WO2023021626A1 - Wireless access network device, wireless communication device, method and recording medium - Google Patents

Wireless access network device, wireless communication device, method and recording medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023021626A1
WO2023021626A1 PCT/JP2021/030241 JP2021030241W WO2023021626A1 WO 2023021626 A1 WO2023021626 A1 WO 2023021626A1 JP 2021030241 W JP2021030241 W JP 2021030241W WO 2023021626 A1 WO2023021626 A1 WO 2023021626A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
access network
radio access
network device
transmission
signal
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/030241
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
真明 谷尾
一志 村岡
直人 石井
Original Assignee
日本電気株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日本電気株式会社 filed Critical 日本電気株式会社
Priority to PCT/JP2021/030241 priority Critical patent/WO2023021626A1/en
Priority to JP2023542104A priority patent/JPWO2023021626A1/ja
Publication of WO2023021626A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023021626A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03MCODING; DECODING; CODE CONVERSION IN GENERAL
    • H03M3/00Conversion of analogue values to or from differential modulation
    • H03M3/02Delta modulation, i.e. one-bit differential modulation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B10/00Transmission systems employing electromagnetic waves other than radio-waves, e.g. infrared, visible or ultraviolet light, or employing corpuscular radiation, e.g. quantum communication
    • H04B10/25Arrangements specific to fibre transmission
    • H04B10/2575Radio-over-fibre, e.g. radio frequency signal modulated onto an optical carrier
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B3/00Line transmission systems
    • H04B3/02Details
    • H04B3/04Control of transmission; Equalising

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a radio access network device, radio communication device, method and recording medium.
  • a wireless communication device In the field of wireless communication, technology development is progressing to achieve high-speed communication in order to cope with the increase in traffic. In order to achieve high-speed communication, a wireless communication device usually needs to be equipped with a high-speed and high-precision DAC (Digital-to-Analog Converter). However, there is a problem that the power consumption of such a device increases.
  • DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter
  • delta-sigma modulation may be used (see, for example, Patent Document 1, Non-Patent Document 1, and Non-Patent Document 2).
  • Delta-sigma modulation is a process of converting an analog signal as an input signal into a quantized signal (pulse train). Delta-sigma modulation can reduce the resolution requirements of the DAC (potentially down to 1 bit). Thereby, the power consumption of the wireless communication device can be reduced.
  • a configuration is known in which a plurality of functions of a radio access network device are divided into two physically separated communication devices.
  • a base station is divided into a Base Band Unit (BBU) and a Remote Unit (RU).
  • the RU may also be called RRU (Remote Radio Unit), RRH (Remote Radio Head), or RAU (Remote Antenna Unit).
  • the BBU and RU are connected via a communication path (for example, optical fiber).
  • RoF Radio over Fiber
  • RoF Radio over Fiber
  • Non-Patent Document 3 a pulse train output by delta-sigma modulation is transmitted from the BBU to the RU via an optical fiber.
  • the RU restores the pulse train to the original analog signal before delta-sigma modulation, for example through an analog bandpass filter (BPF). Since the RU does not need to be equipped with a DAC, the power consumption of the RU can be reduced.
  • BPF analog bandpass filter
  • Non-Patent Document 1 it is known that in a configuration using delta-sigma modulation, a phenomenon called spectrum leakage occurs due to waveform distortion.
  • the spectrum leak is a phenomenon in which signal components in bands around the desired frequency band (that is, bands other than the desired frequency band) occur.
  • the quality of the signal output from the RU is degraded due to spectrum leakage.
  • This disclosure provides techniques for sending or receiving information to improve transmission between two communication devices.
  • a first radio access network device that performs processing for a first physical layer.
  • the first radio access network device is between the first radio access network device and a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer.
  • an obtaining unit for obtaining information about transmission; and a transmitting unit for transmitting said information about said transmission to said second radio access network device.
  • a second radio access network device that performs processing for a second physical layer above the first physical layer.
  • the second radio access network device includes: a first radio access network device that performs processing related to the first physical layer; and a receiving unit that receives information related to transmission between the second radio access network device. and a processing unit that performs processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission.
  • a wireless communication device includes a first radio access network device that performs processing related to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer. And prepare.
  • the first radio access network device obtains information regarding transmissions between the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device, and transmits the information regarding the transmissions to the second radio access network device.
  • the second radio access network device receives the information regarding the transmission and uses the information regarding the transmission to perform processing relating to communication with the first radio access network device.
  • a method in a first radio access network device that performs processing for a first physical layer. The method obtains information about transmissions between the first radio access network device and a second radio access network device performing processing on a second physical layer above the first physical layer. and sending said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device.
  • a method is provided in a second radio access network device for processing for a second physical layer above the first physical layer.
  • the method comprises: receiving information regarding a transmission between a first radio access network device performing processing for the first physical layer and the second radio access network device; using to perform processing related to communication with the first radio access network device.
  • a computer-readable non-transitory recording medium includes a first radio access network device that performs processing related to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer.
  • a program is recorded which causes a processor to obtain information regarding transmissions to and from a network device and to transmit said information regarding said transmissions to said second radio access network device.
  • a computer-readable non-transitory recording medium includes a first radio access network device that performs processing related to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a wireless communication device according to a first embodiment
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a delta-sigma modulation section according to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a neural network processing unit according to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a neural network learning unit according to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a modulating section according to the first embodiment
  • FIG. It is a figure explaining the flow of construction
  • FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of the delta-sigma modulation device according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of a concrete structure of the radio
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the configuration of a wireless communication device according to a second embodiment
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification;
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a radio communication device according to a modification;
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a radio communication device according to a modification;
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the configuration of a wireless communication device according to a third embodiment;
  • FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of a wireless communication device according to a fourth embodiment;
  • FIG. FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the fourth embodiment;
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification;
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification;
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification;
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification;
  • FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification;
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a radio communication device according to a modification;
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a radio communication device according to a modification;
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of a wireless communication device according to a fifth embodiment;
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of a first radio access network device according to the fifth embodiment;
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of a second radio access network device according to the fifth embodiment;
  • FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of the first radio access network device according to the fifth embodiment;
  • FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of the second radio access network device according to the fifth embodiment;
  • FIG. 1 is an example of a system using delta-sigma modulation and RoF technology;
  • 1 is an example of a system using delta-sigma modulation and RoF technology;
  • Second Embodiment 3-1 Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device 3-2. Configuration of first device 3-3.
  • Configuration of second device 3-4 Outline of processing flow of wireless communication device 3-5. Flow of processing of wireless communication device 3-6. Modification 4.
  • Third Embodiment 4-1 Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device 4-2. Configuration of first device 4-3. Configuration of second device 5 .
  • Fourth Embodiment 5-1 Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device 5-2. Configuration of first device 5-3. Configuration of second device 5-4. Flow of processing of wireless communication device 5-5.
  • Fifth Embodiment 6-1 Configuration of Wireless Communication Device 6-2. Flow of processing of wireless communication device 6-3. Modification
  • FIG. 38 is an example of a system using delta-sigma modulation and RoF technology.
  • the system comprises a first device 3710 and a second device 3720 .
  • First device 3710 and second device 3720 are connected via optical fiber 3730 .
  • a first device 3710 includes an O/E converter (Optic-Electric converter) 3711 , a bandpass filter (BPF) 3712 , an amplifier 3713 and an antenna 3714 .
  • the second device 3720 comprises a delta-sigma modulator 3721 and an E/O converter (Electric-Optic converter) 3722 .
  • An analog signal 3741 as an input signal is converted into a quantized signal (pulse train) 3742 through a delta-sigma modulator 3721 .
  • the delta-sigma modulation section 3721 has a general configuration of one input and one output, and the quantized signal (pulse train) is fed back inside the delta-sigma modulation section 3721 .
  • the pulse train 3742 is converted into an optical signal through the E/O converter 3722 .
  • Optical signals are transmitted over optical fiber 3730 . After that, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal 3743 through the O/E converter 3711 .
  • Electrical signal 3743 is converted through BPF 3712 to original analog signal 3745 before delta-sigma modulation.
  • Analog signal 3745 is amplified using amplifier 3713 .
  • the amplified analog signal is output from antenna 3714 .
  • FIG. 39 is an example of a system using delta-sigma modulation and RoF technology.
  • distortion occurs in the pulse train 3742 during the transmission process of the pulse train 3742 .
  • distortion occurs as the optical signal passes through the optical fiber 3730 .
  • Such distortion is referred to as "optical transmission distortion”.
  • a pulse train 3810 represents a state in which optical transmission distortion has occurred.
  • Pulse train 3820 represents a state in which electrical transmission distortion has occurred.
  • optical transmission distortion and electrical transmission distortion are collectively referred to as "transmission distortion”.
  • the transmission distortion affects the frequency components of the analog signal 3830 output via the BPF 3712. Specifically, the above spectrum leak occurs. This degrades the signal to noise ratio of analog signal 3830 . Thus, there is a problem that the signal quality deteriorates due to transmission distortion.
  • an arrangement is required to send or receive appropriate information to improve the transmission between the two devices (the first device 3710 and the second device 3720).
  • a wireless communication device comprises a first radio access network device and a second radio access network device.
  • the first radio access network device is a device that performs processing related to the first physical layer.
  • the second radio access network device is a device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer.
  • the first and second physical layers are the first layer (lowest layer) among multiple layers forming the communication protocol implemented in the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device. ) can be considered to be included in
  • the first radio access network device comprises: an obtaining unit for obtaining information about transmission between the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device; and transmitting information about the transmission to the second radio access network device. and a transmitter for transmitting.
  • the second radio access network device includes a receiving unit that receives information about transmission, and a processing unit that uses the information about transmission to perform processing related to communication with the first radio access network device.
  • the above configuration has the following effects.
  • the first radio access network device sends (feeds back) information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device.
  • the second radio access network device can use the information regarding the transmission to improve the transmission between the two devices (the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device).
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a wireless communication device 100.
  • Wireless communication device 100 is a device conforming to the technical specifications of 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project).
  • the wireless communication device 100 may be a device conforming to the technical specifications of 5G (5th Generation).
  • wireless communication device 100 is not limited to this example.
  • a wireless communication device 100 includes a delta-sigma modulation device 110 and a transmission path 120 .
  • Radio communication apparatus 100 converts the signal output by delta-sigma modulation apparatus 110 into a radio signal via transmission path 120 and transmits the radio signal to terminal apparatus 190 .
  • the delta-sigma modulation device 110 includes a delta-sigma modulation section 111, a neural network processing section 112, and a neural network learning section 113.
  • the neural network processing unit 112 is referred to as “NN processing unit 112”.
  • the neural network learning unit 113 is called “NN learning unit 113”.
  • the transmission path 120 includes a communication path 130 and a transmission section 140 .
  • Communication path 130 connects delta-sigma modulation section 111 and transmission section 140 .
  • the transmitter 140 includes an antenna 141 , a bandpass filter (BPF) 142 , an amplifier 143 and a modulator 144 .
  • BPF bandpass filter
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 performs delta-sigma modulation on an analog signal as an external input signal and outputs a quantized signal (1-bit pulse train).
  • the quantized signal is sent to BPF 142 via communication path 130 .
  • the BPF 142 performs bandpass processing (hereinafter referred to as “BPF processing”) for passing only a desired frequency band on the quantized signal.
  • the quantized signal is converted to an analog signal through BPF 142 . That is, the quantized signal is restored to the original analog signal before delta-sigma modulation.
  • Amplifier 143 amplifies the analog signal.
  • Antenna 141 outputs the amplified analog signal.
  • the transmission section 140 has a function of transmitting a signal toward the terminal device 190 .
  • the amplified analog signal is also output to the modulation section 144 .
  • Modulation section 144 performs modulation processing on the analog signal and outputs the modulated analog signal to NN learning section 113 .
  • the transmitter 140 also has a function of transmitting (that is, feeding back) the signal generated through the transmission process of the quantized signal output from the delta-sigma modulator 111 to the delta-sigma modulator 110 .
  • the analog signal input to the delta-sigma modulation section 111 will be referred to as a "first signal”.
  • the quantized signal output by the delta-sigma modulating section 111 is referred to as a "second signal”.
  • a signal generated through the transmission process of the second signal and fed back to the NN learning unit 113 is referred to as a "third signal”.
  • the third signal is a signal generated in the course of the second signal being transmitted over transmission path 120 .
  • the third signal may contain information about transmission distortions induced in transmission path 120 . Accordingly, the third signal is used to feed back information about transmission distortions that have occurred in transmission path 120 .
  • the NN processing unit 112 includes a first neural network 300 that operates according to predetermined parameters (see FIG. 3).
  • first neural network 300 will be referred to as "first NN 300".
  • first parameters The parameters of the first NN 300 are referred to as "first parameters”.
  • the NN learning unit 113 receives the second signal and the third signal as input signals. NN learning section 113 calculates the first parameter using the second signal and the third signal. NN learning section 113 transmits the calculated first parameter to NN processing section 112 .
  • the NN processing unit 112 receives the first parameter from the NN learning unit 113 .
  • the NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter (that is, the first parameter calculated by the NN learning unit 113).
  • the NN processing unit 112 receives the second signal as an input signal.
  • the NN processing unit 112 uses the second signal to output an approximate value (analog signal) of the signal generated through at least part of the transmission process of the second signal through the first NN 300 .
  • this approximation will be referred to as the "fourth signal”.
  • NN processing section 112 can use the fourth signal to feed back, to delta-sigma modulation section 111, information about the transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal.
  • the delta-sigma modulation section 111 receives the first signal and the fourth signal as input signals. Delta-sigma modulation section 111 performs delta-sigma modulation on the first signal using the fourth signal, and outputs the second signal.
  • the 1-input 1-output configuration described in FIG. 38 (that is, the delta-sigma modulation section 3721 in which the quantized signal is directly fed back) is called delta-sigma modulation.
  • the second signal is not directly fed back as the fourth signal, and the second and fourth signals have NN processing unit 112 between them. separated by an interposition.
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 receives the first signal and the fourth signal as input signals and outputs the second signal, that is, has a two-input one-output configuration. In one or more embodiments of the present disclosure, for convenience, such a two-input, one-output configuration is defined as delta-sigma modulation.
  • the NN processing unit 112 has a feedback function. One or more embodiments are characterized in that the first parameter in the NN processing unit 112 is updated by the NN learning unit 113 .
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 of this example is a band-pass type device, and is implemented with reference to Non-Patent Document 1.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the delta-sigma modulation section 111.
  • Delta-sigma modulation section 111 includes upconverter 210 , loop filter 220 , and quantizer 230 .
  • the first signal is a baseband signal and includes an in-phase component signal (hereinafter referred to as "I signal”) and a quadrature component signal (hereinafter referred to as "Q signal").
  • I signal in-phase component signal
  • Q signal quadrature component signal
  • the upconverter 210 is a 2-input, 1-output component. Upconverter 210 receives the I and Q signals as input signals. Upconverter 210 upconverts the first signal (I signal and Q signal) to a desired frequency (target frequency) f0.
  • the upconverter 210 includes a first multiplier 211a, a second multiplier 211b, and an adder 212.
  • the first multiplier 211 a multiplies the I signal by cos ⁇ t and outputs the multiplication result to the adder 212 .
  • the second multiplier 211 b multiplies the Q signal by ⁇ sin ⁇ t and outputs the multiplication result to the adder 212 .
  • cos() is a cosine function
  • sin() is a sine function (same below).
  • 2 ⁇ f0.
  • the adder 212 adds the multiplication result of the first multiplier 211a and the multiplication result of the second multiplier 211b, and outputs the addition result.
  • the loop filter 220 is a 2-input, 1-output element. Loop filter 220 receives as input signals the output of upconverter 210 and the fourth signal. The loop filter 220 performs processing for suppressing transmission distortion contained in the feedback component (that is, the fourth signal) of the input signal.
  • the loop filter 220 includes a first adder 221a, a second adder 221b, and a transfer function processing section 222.
  • the first adder 221 a adds the output of the upconverter 210 (the output of the adder 212 ) and the fourth signal, and outputs the addition result to the transfer function processing section 222 .
  • the output of the first adder 221a is the difference between the output of the upconverter 210 and the fourth signal.
  • the output of the first adder 221a may contain transmission distortion components that occur during the transmission process of the second signal.
  • the transfer function processing unit 222 applies a transfer function to the output of the first adder 221a to suppress (or to cancel).
  • the transfer function is a function that determines the characteristics of the delta-sigma modulation in this example, and is determined based on the desired signal transfer function, noise transfer function, and the like.
  • the second adder 221 b adds the output of the upconverter 210 and the output of the transfer function processing section 222 and outputs the addition result to the quantizer 230 .
  • loop filter 220 uses the output of upconverter 210 and the fourth signal to generate a signal (analog signal).
  • Quantizer 230 is a 1-bit quantizer.
  • the quantizer 230 quantizes the output of the loop filter 220 (output of the second adder 221b) with 1 bit and outputs a second signal (1-bit pulse train).
  • delta-sigma modulation section 111 uses the fourth signal to calculate a component for suppressing at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal, and converts the calculated component into the second signal. reflected in the signal.
  • the loop filter 220 may omit the second adder 221b.
  • the output of transfer function processing section 222 is input to quantizer 230 .
  • the output of transfer function processing section 222 includes the output of upconverter 210 and a component for suppressing at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the NN processing unit 112.
  • NN processing unit 112 includes a first NN 300 .
  • the first NN 300 receives the second signal as an input signal and outputs a fourth signal.
  • the fourth signal is an approximation (estimate) of the signal generated while the second signal passes through part of the transmission path 120 . More specifically, the fourth signal is an approximation (estimate) of the signal generated in the course of the second signal passing through communication path 130 , BPF 142 and amplifier 143 . In other words, the fourth signal is an approximation (estimate) of the radio signal output from antenna 141 .
  • the fourth signal contains an approximation of at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs through the transmission process of the second signal.
  • the fourth signal includes an approximation of at least a portion of the transmission distortion that the second signal experiences as it passes through communication path 130 , BPF 142 and amplifier 143 .
  • the first NN 300 operates according to the first parameters.
  • the first parameters include, for example, weights and biases.
  • the first parameters include, for example, weights and biases.
  • f in equation (1) be the activation function in the neural network, where x is the input, w is the weight, and b is the bias. f(wx+b) (1)
  • the first NN 300 comprises an input layer 310 , an intermediate layer 320 and an output layer 330 .
  • the intermediate layer 320 is one layer.
  • the input layer 310 includes a node 310a into which the current value of the second signal is input. Additionally, the input layer 310 further includes a node 310b into which the past value of the second signal is input. Note that "D" represents delay.
  • the output layer 330 is a linear layer with no activation functions. A first parameter is reflected in the intermediate layer 320 . The output layer 330 outputs the sum of the outputs of the multiple nodes of the intermediate layer 320 as a fourth signal.
  • the configuration of the first NN 300 is not limited to the configuration of FIG. Various commonly used neural networks may be applied to this embodiment.
  • the intermediate layer 320 of the first NN 300 may have multiple layers. That is, a multilayer neural network may be adopted as the first NN 300 .
  • the NN processing unit 112 receives the first parameter from the NN learning unit 113 .
  • the NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter. That is, the NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter according to the state of the transmission path 120 . Therefore, the NN processing unit 112 can reflect at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the current state of the transmission path 120 in the fourth signal.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the NN learning unit 113.
  • NN learning section 113 includes transmission model 410 , error calculation section 420 , and parameter calculation section 430 .
  • the transmission model 410 is a component that models at least part of the transmission process of the second signal.
  • transmission model 410 is a component that models transmission path 120 .
  • Transmission model 410 uses the second signal to output an approximation (estimate) of the third signal.
  • the transmission model 410 includes a second neural network 600 operating according to predetermined parameters (see FIG. 6).
  • the second neural network 600 is hereinafter referred to as the "second NN 600".
  • the parameters of the second NN 600 are referred to as "second parameters”.
  • the second parameter like the first parameter, includes weights and biases.
  • the error calculator 420 receives the output of the transmission model 410 (approximate value of the third signal) and the third signal (output of the modulator 144 in this example) as input signals. Error calculator 420 calculates the error (difference) between the output of transmission model 410 and the third signal. Hereinafter, this error will be referred to as the "approximation error”. Error calculator 420 outputs the approximation error to parameter calculator 430 .
  • the parameter calculator 430 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter using the approximation error.
  • Parameter calculator 430 transmits the calculated first parameter to NN processor 112 .
  • the parameter calculator 430 updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 to the calculated second parameter.
  • the NN learning unit 113 learns the current state of the transmission path 120 using the second signal and the third signal. That is, the NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter according to the current state of the transmission path 120.
  • FIG. NN learning section 113 can reflect at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the current state of transmission path 120 in first NN 300 and second NN 600 .
  • the communication path 130 includes one or both of an electrical transmission line (eg, metal wire) that transmits electrical signals and an optical transmission line (eg, optical fiber) that transmits optical signals.
  • an electrical transmission line eg, metal wire
  • an optical transmission line eg, optical fiber
  • the communication path 130 includes one or more of an E/O converter that converts an electrical signal into an optical signal, an O/E converter that converts an optical signal into an electrical signal, a bandpass filter, a frequency converter, and the like. may include a combination of
  • BPF 142 performs BPF processing on the output of communication path 130 .
  • the desired frequency band is a band from f0-f ⁇ to f0+f ⁇ .
  • f ⁇ is an arbitrary frequency.
  • the BPF 142 may be composed of analog elements.
  • BPF 142 may be an LC filter or an RLC filter.
  • An LC filter is a filter based on a combination of inductors (L) and capacitors (C).
  • An RLC filter is a filter based on a combination of resistors (R), inductors (L) and capacitors (C).
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the modulating section 144. As shown in FIG. Modulation section 144 down-converts the output of amplifier 143 by a direct conversion method and outputs the down-converted signal as a third signal.
  • the modulating section 144 includes a first modulating section 500a and a second modulating section 500b.
  • the first modulating section 500a includes a first multiplier 510a, a first low-pass filter (LPF) 520a, and a first A/D converter (ADC) 530a.
  • LPF low-pass filter
  • ADC A/D converter
  • the first multiplier 510a multiplies the output of the amplifier 143 by cos ⁇ t and outputs the multiplication result to the first LPF 520a.
  • 2 ⁇ f0.
  • the first LPF 520a performs low-pass filtering on the output of the first multiplier 510a and outputs the execution result to the first ADC 530a.
  • the first ADC 530a converts the output of the first LPF 520a into a digital signal, thereby outputting a digital I signal.
  • the second modulation section 500b includes a second multiplier 510b, a second low-pass filter (LPF) 520b, and a second A/D converter (ADC) 530b.
  • LPF low-pass filter
  • ADC A/D converter
  • the second multiplier 510b multiplies the output of the amplifier 143 by -sin ⁇ t and outputs the multiplication result to the second LPF 520b.
  • the second LPF 520b performs low-pass filtering on the output of the second multiplier 510b and outputs the execution result to the second ADC 530b.
  • the second ADC 530b converts the output of the second LPF 520b into a digital signal, thereby outputting a digital Q signal.
  • the third signal includes a digital I signal and a digital Q signal.
  • the third signal is input to NN learning section 113 .
  • FIG. 6 is an example of the flow of constructing the transmission model 410 .
  • the transmission path 120 includes a communication path 130, a BPF 142, an amplifier 143, and a modulation section 144.
  • amplifier 143 does not have strong nonlinearity, ie amplifier 143 has strong linearity.
  • the BPF 142 also has linearity, the position of the BPF 142 and the position of the amplifier 143 can be interchanged as shown in the middle part of FIG. That is, the configuration of the upper transmission path 120 can be approximated by the middle transmission path 120'. This allows the communication path 130 and the amplifier 143 to be modeled together.
  • the communication path 130 and amplifier 143 are collectively modeled by the second NN 600.
  • the second NN 600 outputs an approximation (estimate) of the signal generated through part of the transmission process of the second signal.
  • second NN 600 outputs an approximation of the signal generated in the course of the second signal passing through communication path 130 and amplifier 143 .
  • the BPF 142 is modeled by a digital filter 610.
  • Digital filter 610 may be, for example, FIR (Finite impulse response).
  • the modulation section 144 is modeled by a digital downconverter 620 .
  • Digital downconverter 620 has the same functions/properties as modulator 144 . Accordingly, the digital downconverter 620 downconverts the output of the digital filter 610 to output a digital I signal and a digital Q signal.
  • the approximation error represents the error between the approximation of the third signal (output of transmission model 410) and the actual third signal (output of modulator 144).
  • the transmission distortion information generated in the transmission path 120 is not reflected in the second NN 600, so the transmission model 410 outputs the second signal as it is.
  • the actual third signal includes transmission distortion caused during the transmission process of the second signal.
  • the approximation error increases. If the approximation error is large, this means that the information about the transmission distortion currently occurring in the transmission path 120 cannot be reflected in the first NN 300 and the second NN 600, and therefore the transmission distortion cannot be suppressed. means.
  • the amount of distortion changes over time.
  • the approximation error is large, it also means that the difference (error) between the amount of distortion included in the output of the transmission model 410 and the amount of distortion included in the actual third signal is large. Therefore, the approximation error is a value related to the amount of distortion that occurred during the transmission process of the second signal.
  • the error calculator 420 calculates a first difference between the I signal output by the transmission model 410 and the I signal included in the third signal. Since the I signal has a real component, the first difference has a real component. Furthermore, error calculator 420 calculates a second difference between the Q signal output by transmission model 410 and the Q signal included in the third signal. Since the Q signal is the imaginary component, the second difference is the imaginary component.
  • the error calculator 420 calculates an approximation error based on the first difference and the second difference.
  • the approximation error may be a complex number represented by a first difference that is a real component and a second difference that is an imaginary component.
  • the approximation error may be the larger of the absolute value of the first difference and the absolute value of the second difference.
  • the approximation error may be calculated by one of the known calculation methods so long as it represents the error between the output of transmission model 410 and the actual third signal.
  • the parameter calculator 430 uses the approximation error and the internal parameters of the transmission model 410 to calculate the first parameter and the second parameter.
  • the internal parameters of transmission model 410 may include second parameters of second NN 600 and output values of at least one node within second NN 600 .
  • the internal parameters of transmission model 410 may further include filter coefficients of digital filter 610 and sine and cosine waves in digital downconverter 620 .
  • the parameter calculator 430 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter so as to reduce the approximation error.
  • the parameter calculator 430 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter such that at least one of the absolute value of the first difference and the absolute value of the second difference is small.
  • FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing flow of the delta-sigma modulation device 110. As shown in FIG. 7
  • delta-sigma modulation section 111 When radio communication apparatus 100 is activated (or radio communication apparatus 100 is reset), delta-sigma modulation section 111 performs delta-sigma modulation on a first signal as an external input signal to generate a second signal. signal is output (701).
  • the NN learning unit 113 uses the second signal and the third signal to calculate the first parameter and the second parameter (702). NN learning section 113 transmits the calculated first parameter to NN processing section 112 .
  • the NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the first parameter calculated by the NN learning unit 113. Furthermore, the NN learning unit 113 updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 in the transmission model 410 to the calculated second parameter (703).
  • the NN processing unit 112 outputs a fourth signal through the first NN 300 using the second signal (704).
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 performs delta-sigma modulation on the first signal using the fourth signal and outputs the second signal (705).
  • the delta-sigma modulator 110 receives, as a third signal to be fed back, information about transmission distortion that occurred in the transmission process (transmission path 120) of the second signal.
  • Delta-sigma modulator 110 calculates an approximation error using the second signal and the third signal, and calculates the first parameter and the second parameter using the approximation error.
  • the delta-sigma modulator 110 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the calculated first parameter, and updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 to the calculated second parameter. do. Thereby, information on transmission distortion occurring in the transmission path 120 is reflected in the first NN 300 and the second NN 600 .
  • Delta-sigma modulator 110 performs delta-sigma modulation on the first signal using the fourth signal (output of first NN 300). As a result, the delta-sigma modulator 110 can pass the signal component of the target frequency f0 and perform noise shaping to move the noise in the vicinity of the frequency f0 out of the band.
  • the delta-sigma modulation device 110 can suppress transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal by the feedback processing as described above. Therefore, the delta-sigma modulation device 110 can suppress spectrum leak.
  • the delta-sigma modulator 110 is capable of high quality signal transmission.
  • FIG. 8 is an example of a specific configuration of wireless communication device 800 . Constituent elements that have already been described are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
  • a wireless communication device 800 is a node of a radio access network (RAN).
  • wireless communication device 800 is a base station.
  • the wireless communication device 800 performs wireless communication with the terminal device 190 located within its coverage area.
  • a wireless communication device 800 includes multiple devices (or multiple nodes). Specifically, wireless communication device 800 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 .
  • the first device 810 is a node of the radio access network and may be referred to as "first radio access network device”.
  • the second device 820 is a node of the radio access network and may be referred to as "second radio access network device”.
  • the first device 810 performs processing related to the first physical layer.
  • the processing for the first physical layer includes BPF processing and amplification processing.
  • the second device 820 performs processing related to the second physical layer, which is higher than the first physical layer.
  • the processing for the second physical layer includes delta-sigma modulation.
  • the first and second physical layers are included in the first layer (lowest layer) of the multiple layers forming the communication protocol implemented in the first device 810 and the second device 820. You can catch it.
  • the first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the first communication path 131 .
  • Second device 820 transmits a second signal to first device 810 via first communication path 131 .
  • First device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the second communication path 132 .
  • First device 810 transmits information regarding transmissions between first device 810 and second device 820 to second device 820 via second communication path 132 .
  • the information related to transmission is referred to as "transmission-related information”.
  • the transmission-related information is information about transmission of the second signal transmitted from the second device 820 to the first device 810 .
  • the transmission-related information is the third signal (that is, the output of the modulating section 144) generated in the process of transmitting the second signal.
  • the third signal contains information about transmission distortion caused during the transmission process of the second signal.
  • a first device 810 includes an antenna 141 , a BPF 142 , an amplifier 143 , a modulator 144 and an information transmitter 145 .
  • Information transmitter 145 controls communication with second device 820 via second communication path 132 .
  • the information transmission unit 145 controls transmission of transmission-related information.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the first device 810. As shown in FIG.
  • the first device 810 comprises a communication interface 910 , a storage section 920 and a processing section 930 .
  • a communication interface 910 is an interface for communication with other devices.
  • Communication interface 910 includes antenna 141 for wireless communication. Further, the communication interface 910 includes connection terminals, connection circuitry, etc. for communicating with the second device 820 via the first communication path 131 .
  • the communication interface 910 includes connection terminals, connection circuitry, etc. for communicating with the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 .
  • the storage unit 920 includes volatile memory and nonvolatile memory.
  • Volatile memory may include, for example, random access memory (RAM).
  • the non-volatile memory may include, for example, one or more of ROM (Read Only Memory), HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and SSD (Solid State Drive).
  • the non-volatile memory stores program code (instructions) for implementing one or more functions of the first device 810 .
  • the processing unit 930 includes one or more processors.
  • the one or more processors may include, for example, one or more of a CPU (Central Processing Unit), an MPU (Micro Processing Unit), and a microcontroller.
  • the processing unit 930 implements one or more functions of the first device 810 by executing program codes (instructions) stored in the storage unit 920 .
  • the processing unit 930 may include one or more analog elements and/or analog circuits. Processing unit 930 may implement one or more functions of first device 810 using one or more analog elements and/or analog circuits.
  • the expression "A and/or B" should be interpreted as “A or B” or "A and B.”
  • the second device 820 comprises a delta-sigma modulation section 111 , an NN processing section 112 and an NN learning section 113 .
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the second device 820. As shown in FIG. The second device 820 comprises a communication interface 1010 , a storage section 1020 and a processing section 1030 .
  • a communication interface 1010 is an interface for communication with other devices.
  • the communication interface 1010 includes connection terminals, connection circuits, etc. for communicating with the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 .
  • the communication interface 1010 includes connection terminals, connection circuitry, etc. for communicating with the first device 810 via the second communication path 132 .
  • the communication interface 1010 may include connection terminals, connection circuits, and the like for communicating with nodes (not shown) of the core network. Additionally, communication interface 1010 may include an antenna for wirelessly communicating with first device 810 .
  • the storage unit 1020 includes volatile memory and nonvolatile memory.
  • Volatile memory may include, for example, RAM.
  • Non-volatile memory may include, for example, one or more of ROM, HDD and SSD.
  • the non-volatile memory stores program code (instructions) for implementing one or more functions of the second device 820 .
  • the processing unit 1030 includes one or more processors.
  • the one or more processors may include, for example, one or more of a CPU, MPU and microcontroller.
  • the processing unit 1030 implements one or more functions of the second device 820 by executing program codes (instructions) stored in the storage unit 1020 .
  • the processing unit 1030 may include one or more analog elements and/or analog circuits.
  • the processing unit 1030 may implement one or more functions of the second device 820 using one or more analog elements and/or analog circuits.
  • FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 800. As shown in FIG. 11
  • the second device 820 executes the process of step 701 in FIG. 7 (1101). Accordingly, second device 820 transmits a second signal to first device 810 .
  • the first device 810 receives the second signal. After that, the first device 810 (the information transmitting unit 145 in this example) transmits the transmission-related information (the third signal in this example) to the second device 820 (1102).
  • the second device 820 receives the transmission-related information and executes the processing of steps 702 to 704 in FIG. 7 (1103).
  • the second device 820 executes the process of step 705 in FIG. 7 (1104). Accordingly, second device 820 transmits a second signal to first device 810 . After that, the processing of steps 1102 to 1104 is repeatedly executed.
  • the information transmitting section 145 of the first device 810 may transmit transmission-related information to the second device 820 according to a predetermined rule.
  • the information transmitter 145 may periodically (ie, at predetermined time intervals) transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
  • the information transmitter 145 may aperiodically transmit transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
  • the first device 810 can feed back transmission related information to the second device 820 .
  • the second device 820 can receive the transmission-related information and perform appropriate processing for transmission distortion caused during the transmission process of the second signal. For example, the second device 820 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 with transmission related information. This allows second device 820 to transmit to first device 810 a second signal containing a component for suppressing transmission distortion. Therefore, the transmission between the two devices (the first device 810 and the second device 820) can be improved.
  • the delta-sigma modulation section 111 may be a low-pass type device.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the delta-sigma modulation section 111.
  • first I signal the I signal included in the first signal
  • Q signal the Q signal included in the first signal
  • Delta-sigma modulation section 111 includes down converter 1210, first loop filter 1220, second loop filter 1230, first quantizer 1240, second quantizer 1250, and up converter 1260. Prepare.
  • the downconverter 1210 includes a first multiplier 1211a and a second multiplier 1211b.
  • the first multiplier 1211a multiplies the fourth signal by cos ⁇ t to generate the I component of the fourth signal.
  • 2 ⁇ f0.
  • First multiplier 1211 a outputs the second I signal to first loop filter 1220 .
  • the second multiplier 1211b multiplies the fourth signal by -sin ⁇ t to generate the Q component of the fourth signal.
  • the Q component generated from the fourth signal will be referred to as the "second Q signal”.
  • Second multiplier 1211 b outputs the second Q signal to second loop filter 1230 .
  • downconverter 1210 downconverts the fourth signal into a second I signal and a second Q signal.
  • the sampling rate of the signal is set to 1/4 times the target frequency f0, that is, f0/4
  • the signal example of cos ⁇ t is [1, 0, ⁇ 1, 0, 1, .
  • the signal train of sin ⁇ t is [0, ⁇ 1, 0, 1, 0, . . . ].
  • the symbol "/" here represents division. This simplifies the multiplication process described above. This modification may include such processing.
  • the first loop filter 1220 performs processing for suppressing transmission distortion included in the feedback component (that is, the second I signal). Specifically, the first loop filter 1220 uses the first I signal and the second I signal to reduce at least one of the transmission distortions that occur in the transmission process of the second signal (that is, the transmission path 120). outputs a signal that includes a first component for suppressing the part.
  • the first loop filter 1220 includes a first adder 1221a, a second adder 1221b, and a transfer function processing section 1222.
  • the first adder 1221a adds the first I signal and the second I signal.
  • the first adder 1221 a outputs the addition result to the transfer function processing section 1222 .
  • the output of the first adder 1221a is the difference between the first I signal and the second I signal.
  • the output of the first adder 1221a contains part of the transmission distortion component that occurs during the transmission process of the second signal.
  • the transfer function processing unit 1222 applies a transfer function to the output of the first adder 1221a and outputs a first component for suppressing at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the transmission path 120.
  • the transfer function is a function that determines the characteristics of the delta-sigma modulation in this example, and is determined based on the desired signal transfer function, noise transfer function, and the like.
  • the second adder 1221 b adds the first I signal and the output of the transfer function processing section 1222 and outputs the addition result to the first quantizer 1240 .
  • the first quantizer 1240 is a 1-bit quantizer. First quantizer 1240 quantizes the output of second adder 1221 b by 1 bit and outputs a first quantized signal to upconverter 1260 .
  • the second loop filter 1230 performs processing for suppressing transmission distortion included in the feedback component (that is, the second Q signal). Specifically, the second loop filter 1230 uses the first Q signal and the second Q signal to reduce at least one of the transmission distortions that occur in the transmission process of the second signal (that is, the transmission path 120). outputs a signal containing a second component for suppressing the part.
  • the second loop filter 1230 includes a first adder 1231a, a second adder 1231b, and a transfer function processing section 1232.
  • the first adder 1231a adds the first Q signal and the second Q signal.
  • the first adder 1231 a outputs the addition result to the transfer function processing section 1232 .
  • the output of the first adder 1231a is the difference between the first Q signal and the second Q signal.
  • the output of the first adder 1231a contains part of the transmission distortion component that occurs in the transmission process of the second signal.
  • the transfer function processing unit 1232 applies a transfer function to the output of the first adder 1231a and outputs a second component for suppressing at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the transmission path 120.
  • the transfer function is the function that determines the characteristics of the delta-sigma modulation in this example, and is determined based on the desired signal transfer function and noise transfer function.
  • the second adder 1231 b adds the first Q signal and the output of the transfer function processing section 1232 and outputs the addition result to the second quantizer 1250 .
  • the second quantizer 1250 is a 1-bit quantizer. Second quantizer 1250 quantizes the output of second adder 1231 b by 1 bit and outputs a second quantized signal to upconverter 1260 .
  • the upconverter 1260 is a 2-input, 1-output component.
  • Upconverter 1260 comprises a first multiplier 1261 a , a second multiplier 1261 b and an adder 1262 .
  • the first multiplier 1261 a multiplies the first quantized signal by cos ⁇ t and outputs the multiplication result to the adder 1262 .
  • the second multiplier 1261 b multiplies the second quantized signal by -sin ⁇ t and outputs the multiplication result to the adder 1262 .
  • the adder 1262 adds the output of the first multiplier 1261a and the output of the second multiplier 1261b to output a second signal.
  • upconverter 1260 upconverts the first quantized signal and the second quantized signal to output a second signal.
  • the signal example of cos ⁇ t is [1, 0, ⁇ 1, 0, 1, .
  • the signal train of sin ⁇ t is [0, ⁇ 1, 0, 1, 0, . . . ].
  • the symbol "/" here represents division. This simplifies the multiplication process described above.
  • the output of the first quantizer 1240 and the output of the second quantizer 1250 are binarized signal instances (ie, either 1 or -1), the output of the adder 1262 is The output is also a binarized signal example.
  • the processing of upconverter 1260 does not impair the quantization of the signal. This modification may include such processing.
  • a fourth signal (output of first NN 300 ) is fed back to first loop filter 1220 and second loop filter 1230 via downconverter 1210 .
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 can pass the signal component of the target frequency f0 and perform noise shaping to shift noise in the vicinity of the frequency f0 out of the band.
  • the second adder 1221b may be omitted.
  • the output of transfer function processing section 1222 is input to first quantizer 1240 .
  • the transfer function in transfer function processor 1222 is set such that the output of transfer function processor 1222 includes the first I signal and the first component.
  • the second adder 1231b may be omitted.
  • the output of transfer function processing section 1232 is input to second quantizer 1250 .
  • the transfer function in transfer function processor 1232 is set such that the output of transfer function processor 1232 includes the first Q signal and the second component.
  • the first NN 300 may be configured to output an approximation of the signal generated through part of the transmission path 120 .
  • first NN 300 outputs an approximation of the signal generated by the second signal passing through communication path 130 . With this configuration, at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in transmission path 120 can be suppressed.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the first NN 300. As shown in FIG.
  • the input layer 310 may include nodes 310c and 310d to which the results of logic operations of two nodes in the input layer 310 are input.
  • logical operations may include logical AND (AND) and exclusive OR (XOR), and the like.
  • the input layer 310 may include a node to which a logical operation between a first result of the logical operation of two nodes and a second result of the logical operation of the two nodes is input. That is, the input layer 310 may include nodes to which results of logic operations of two or more nodes in the input layer 310 are input.
  • the above configuration has the following effects.
  • the first NN 300 can efficiently generate nonlinear distortion such as inter-symbol interference that occurs while the second signal passes through the transmission path 120 .
  • the accuracy of the fourth signal output by the first NN 300 is improved.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the first NN300.
  • Node 310 a may have an output line (connection line) through which the current value of the second signal is output to output layer 330 without going through intermediate layer 320 .
  • the above configuration has the following effects. No weight is applied to the current value of the second signal because the current value of the second signal does not pass through the hidden layer 320 .
  • the first NN 300 can efficiently reflect the residual from the current input value in the fourth signal. The accuracy of the fourth signal output by the first NN 300 is improved.
  • the first NN 300 may be a combination of the configurations described above.
  • Input layer 310 includes at least a node into which the current value of the second signal is input.
  • the input layer 310 includes a node to which the past value of the second signal is input, a node to which the result of logical operation of two or more nodes in the input layer 310 is input, and a current value of the second signal. and a node having an output line that outputs to the output layer 330 without going through the intermediate layer 320 .
  • the first NN 300 may include various known structures.
  • FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing flow of the delta-sigma modulation device 110. As shown in FIG. The flowchart in FIG. 15 is a flowchart in which step 1501 is added to the flowchart in FIG.
  • the NN learning unit 113 determines whether or not a predetermined first condition is satisfied (1501). If the first condition is satisfied, the delta-sigma modulation device 110 executes the processing of steps 702 and 703 . Accordingly, the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 are updated.
  • the delta-sigma modulation device 110 does not execute the processing of step 702 and the processing of step 703. That is, the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 are not updated.
  • the first condition is that the approximation error is larger than a predetermined first magnitude. Specifically, when the approximation error is the larger one of the absolute value of the first difference and the absolute value of the second difference, the first condition is that the approximation error is greater than a predetermined first threshold value Th1. may also be a condition that is large.
  • the first condition may be a condition regarding the absolute value of the complex number (that is, the distance from the origin on the complex number plane).
  • the first condition may be that the absolute value of the approximation error (distance from the origin) is greater than a predetermined first distance threshold.
  • the first condition may include a condition for the first difference and a condition for the second difference. For example, when the absolute value of the first difference exceeds a predetermined first real component threshold and/or the absolute value of the second difference exceeds a predetermined first imaginary component threshold, the NN learning unit 113 It may be determined that the first condition is satisfied.
  • the state of the transmission path 120 changes from moment to moment.
  • the delta-sigma modulator 110 modulates the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 according to the current state of the transmission path 120 by using the first condition as described above. can be updated.
  • the NN learning unit 113 determines “Yes” in step 1501 . Then, the delta-sigma modulation device 110 executes the processing of steps 702 and 703 .
  • NN learning section 113 determines “No” in step 1501 .
  • Delta-sigma modulator 110 then proceeds to step 704 .
  • the delta-sigma modulator 110 executes the processing of steps 702 and 703 only when it is highly necessary to reflect the current state of the transmission path 120 on the first NN 300 and the second NN 600 . Since the delta-sigma modulation device 110 does not execute the processing of steps 702 and 703 in unnecessary situations, the processing load on the delta-sigma modulation device 110 can be suppressed.
  • the delta-sigma modulation device 110 may repeatedly execute the processing of steps 702 and 703 until a predetermined second condition is satisfied. Specifically, the parameter calculator 430 continues the process of calculating the first parameter and the second parameter until the second condition is satisfied. Parameter calculator 430 continues the process of updating the second parameter of second NN 600 until the second condition is satisfied. The NN processing unit 112 continues the process of updating the first parameter of the first NN 300 until the second condition is satisfied.
  • the second condition is that the approximation error is smaller than a predetermined second magnitude.
  • the second magnitude is less than the first magnitude.
  • the second condition is that the approximation error is greater than the predetermined second threshold Th2.
  • the second threshold Th2 is smaller than the first threshold Th1.
  • the second condition may be a condition regarding the absolute value of the complex number (that is, the distance from the origin on the complex number plane).
  • the second condition may be that the absolute value of the approximation error (distance from the origin) is smaller than a predetermined second distance threshold.
  • the second distance threshold is less than the first distance threshold.
  • the second condition may include a condition for the first difference and a condition for the second difference. For example, when the absolute value of the first difference is below a predetermined second real component threshold and/or the absolute value of the second difference is below a predetermined second imaginary component threshold, the NN learning unit 113 It may be determined that condition 2 is established.
  • the second real component threshold is less than the first real component threshold.
  • the second imaginary component threshold is less than the first imaginary component threshold.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the NN learning unit 113. As shown in FIG.
  • NN learning section 113 further includes delay adjustment section 1610 and gain adjustment section 1620 .
  • the delay adjusting section 1610 receives the second signal as an input signal.
  • Delay adjustment section 1610 delays the second signal so that the timing at which the output of transmission model 410 is input to error calculation section 420 and the timing at which the third signal is input to error calculation section 420 are synchronized.
  • the gain adjustment section 1620 receives the third signal as an input signal. Gain adjustment section 1620 multiplies the third signal by the gain. Specifically, gain adjustment section 1620 regards the third signal as a complex number, and multiplies each of the I and Q signals included in the third signal by the complex gain.
  • the delay value in delay adjustment section 1610 and the complex gain in gain adjustment section 1620 are set so that the approximation error output from error calculation section 420 is minimized.
  • the modulation section 144 may down-convert the output of the amplifier 143 by a superheterodyne method and output an IF signal.
  • the modulation section 144 in the transmission path 120 may be omitted.
  • digital downconverter 620 in transmission model 410 is omitted.
  • Error calculator 420 calculates an approximation error between the output of transmission model 410 and the third signal (the output of amplifier 143 in this example).
  • the configuration of the transmission model 410 is not limited to the above example.
  • the configuration of transmission model 410 may be changed as appropriate according to the configuration of delta-sigma modulator 110 and the configuration of transmission path 120 .
  • commonly used digital distortion compensation techniques may be applied to the first signals (I and Q signals).
  • the configuration of transmission model 410 may be modified accordingly.
  • the second NN 600 may be a neural network that models the entire transmission path 120.
  • the transmission model 410 may include components corresponding to this.
  • Transmission model 410 may include components that output the IF signal from the output of digital filter 610 in a superheterodyne fashion.
  • Amplifier 143 may not be modeled as second NN 600 and amplifier 143 may be modeled separately. In another example, modeling of amplifier 143 may be omitted.
  • the second NN 600 may be a component that models part of the transmission path 120 .
  • the second NN600 may be a neural network that outputs the same signal (fourth signal) as the first NN300. That is, the second NN 600 may output an approximation of the signal generated by the second signal passing through the communication path 130 , BPF 142 and amplifier 143 .
  • the second NN 600 may have the same structure as the first NN 300.
  • the second NN 600 comprises an input layer, at least one hidden layer and an output layer.
  • the input layer includes at least a node into which the current value of the second signal is input.
  • the input layer further includes a node to which the past value of the second signal is input, a node to which the result of a logical operation of two or more nodes in the input layer is input, and a current value of the second signal. and a node having an output line from which is output to the output layer without going through the intermediate layer.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the configuration of wireless communication apparatus 1700. As shown in FIG. Wireless communication device 1700 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 .
  • the first communication path 131 includes an optical fiber 131a.
  • the first communication path 131 includes an E/O converter 131b at the end of the optical fiber 131a on the second device 820 side.
  • the E/O converter 131b converts an electrical signal into an optical signal.
  • the first communication path 131 includes an O/E converter 131c at the end of the optical fiber 131a on the first device 810 side.
  • the O/E converter 131c converts the optical signal into an electrical signal.
  • the second communication path 132 includes an optical fiber 132a.
  • the second communication path 132 includes an E/O converter 132b at the end of the optical fiber 132a on the second device 820 side. Further, the second communication path 132 includes an O/E converter 132c at the end of the optical fiber 132a on the first device 810 side.
  • a first device 810 includes an antenna 141 , a BPF 142 , an amplifier 143 , a modulator 144 and an information transmitter 145 .
  • Information transmitting unit 145 transmits the transmission-related information to second device 820 via second communication path 132 .
  • the transmission-related information in this example is the third signal (output of the modulation section 144), as in the first embodiment.
  • the second device 820 includes a delta-sigma modulation section 111 , an NN processing section 112 , an NN learning section 113 and an instruction transmission section 114 .
  • Delta-sigma modulator 111 transmits the second signal to first device 810 via first communication path 131 .
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits instruction signals (initial instruction signal, first instruction signal, and second instruction signal), which will be described later, to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 .
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 determines whether or not the condition regarding the amount of distortion that occurred in the process of transmitting the second signal is satisfied. For example, the condition is the above first condition regarding the approximation error. The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to the first device 810 when the first condition is satisfied.
  • the first instruction signal is a signal that instructs the first device 810 to transmit transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
  • the first indication signal contains information about the number of times Nk that the first device 810 sends the transmission related information to the second device 820 .
  • Nk is an integer of 1 or more.
  • Information transmitting section 145 transmits the transmission-related information to second device 820 in response to the first instruction signal.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 determines whether or not the second condition regarding the approximation error is satisfied.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a second instruction signal to the first device 810 when the second condition is satisfied.
  • the second instruction signal is a signal that instructs the first device 810 to stop sending transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
  • Information transmitting section 145 stops transmitting the transmission-related information in response to the second instruction signal.
  • FIG. 18 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 1700. As shown in FIG. 18
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits an initial instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1801).
  • the initial instruction signal is an instruction signal for causing the first device 810 to transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 only once.
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1802).
  • the information transmitter 145 transmits transmission-related information (third signal in this example) to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 (1803).
  • the second device 820 receives transmission-related information.
  • the second device 820 (that is, the NN processing unit 112 and the NN learning unit 113) executes the processing of steps 702 and 703 in FIG. 7 (1804).
  • steps 702 and 703 are collectively referred to as "learning process”.
  • NN learning section 113 transmits the approximation error calculated in the process of step 702 to instruction transmitting section 114 .
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 uses the approximation error to determine whether the first condition is satisfied. In this example, the instruction transmission unit 114 determines that the first condition is satisfied (1805). Accordingly, the instruction transmitter 114 transmits the first instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1806).
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1807).
  • the information transmission unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 in response to the first instruction signal (1808). This is the first transmission of the transmission-related information from the time when the first device 810 received the first instruction signal.
  • the second device 820 executes learning processing (1809). Each time second device 820 executes the learning process, instruction sending unit 114 determines whether the second condition is satisfied.
  • the delta-sigma modulator 111 then transmits the second signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1810).
  • the information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 (1811). This is the Nj-th transmission of the transmission-related information from when the first device 810 received the first instruction signal. Note that Nj ⁇ Nk.
  • the second device 820 executes learning processing (1812).
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 determines that the second condition is satisfied (1813). Accordingly, the instruction transmitter 114 transmits the second instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1814).
  • Information transmitting section 145 stops transmitting the transmission-related information in response to the second instruction signal.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits an initial instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 each time a predetermined waiting time Tw elapses (1815).
  • the information transmitting unit 145 When the information transmitting unit 145 transmits the transmission-related information Nk times after the first device 810 receives the first instruction signal, the information transmitting unit 145 stops transmitting the transmission-related information.
  • the instruction transmitting unit 114 transmits an initial instruction signal to the first device 810 when a predetermined waiting time Tw has elapsed since the transmission-related information was received Nk times.
  • the second instruction signal may further include information on the waiting time Tw.
  • the information transmitting section 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 each time the waiting time Tw elapses.
  • the instruction transmitting unit 114 determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied each time transmission-related information is received.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to the first device 810 when the first condition is satisfied.
  • the above configuration has the following effects. If the first condition is satisfied (that is, if the approximation error is large), this means that the current state of the transmission path 120 (in particular, information on transmission distortion) can be reflected in the first NN 300 and the second NN 600. This means that the transmission distortion cannot be suppressed. Under such circumstances, the first device 810 feeds back transmission-related information to the second device 820 . The second device 820 can perform a learning process using the transmission related information to update the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 . As a result, transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal can be suppressed. Furthermore, a distributed MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) system that increases the number of simultaneous connections and transmission capacity can be realized.
  • MIMO Multiple Input Multiple Output
  • the first instruction signal is not limited to the above example.
  • the first indication signal may include information about the period Tp with which the first device 810 sends transmission related information to the second device 820 .
  • Information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission-related information to second device 820 every time period Tp elapses in response to the first instruction signal.
  • the period Tp may be k1 times the learning period.
  • k1 is an integer of 1 or more.
  • the learning period is required from the time when the second device 820 receives the transmission-related information until the second device 820 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600. period.
  • the period Tp may be defined by frames, subframes or slots defined on 3GPP.
  • a frame is defined by multiple subframes.
  • a subframe is defined by one or more slots.
  • the period Tp may be defined as "k2 times the frame".
  • k2 is an integer of 1 or more.
  • one frame is 10ms (milliseconds).
  • the period Tp may be defined as "k3 times the subframe".
  • k3 is an integer of 1 or more.
  • one subframe is 1 ms.
  • the period Tp may be defined as "k4 times the slot".
  • k4 is an integer of 1 or more.
  • FIG. 19 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the processing flow of the wireless communication device 1700. As shown in FIG. 19
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits the first instruction signal to the first device 810 (1901).
  • Delta-sigma modulator 111 transmits the second signal to first device 810 (1902).
  • the information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information (third signal in this example) to the second device 820 (1903).
  • the second device 820 performs a learning process (1904).
  • Delta-sigma modulator 111 then repeatedly transmits the second signal to first device 810 (1905).
  • a cycle Tp has passed since the information transmission unit 145 executed the process of step 1903 .
  • the information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 (1906).
  • the second device 820 performs a learning process (1907). After that, the information transmitting section 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 every time the cycle Tp elapses (1908).
  • the above configuration has the following effects.
  • the first device 810 periodically feeds back transmission related information to the second device 820 .
  • the second device 820 can periodically perform a learning process using the transmission related information to update the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 . As a result, transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal can be suppressed.
  • Second Modification Information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to second device 820 when the conditions for transmission between first device 810 and second device 820 are met. good too.
  • the information transmitting section 145 may estimate the amount of distortion that occurred during the transmission process of the second signal based on the second signal.
  • the information transmission unit 145 determines whether or not the third condition regarding the amount of distortion is satisfied.
  • a third condition is that the distortion amount is greater than a predetermined magnitude.
  • the information transmitting unit 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 when the third condition is satisfied.
  • the amount of distortion may be estimated as follows.
  • the information transmission unit 145 analyzes the frequency components of the second signal by executing Fourier transform processing or the like on the second signal.
  • the frequency components outside the above-described desired frequency band band from f0-f ⁇ to f0+f ⁇
  • the information transmitter 145 calculates the signal power of the band outside the desired frequency band.
  • the third condition may be a condition that the signal power in the band outside the desired frequency band is greater than the third threshold Th3.
  • the information transmitting section 145 may determine that the distortion amount is larger than a predetermined magnitude.
  • the signal to be subjected to Fourier transform processing may be any one of the signals 1701 to 1703 shown in FIG. A signal 1701 after passing through the first communication path 131 and before passing through the BPF 142 - Signal 1702 after passing through BPF 142 and before passing through amplifier 143 - Signal 1703 after passing through amplifier 143
  • FIG. 20 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the processing flow of the wireless communication device 1700. As shown in FIG. 20
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2001).
  • the information transmitting unit 145 estimates the amount of distortion as described above, and determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied (2002). In this example, the information transmitting unit 135 determines that the third condition is satisfied (2003). Accordingly, the information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 (2004).
  • the second device 820 performs a learning process (2005).
  • the delta-sigma modulator 111 then repeatedly transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2006).
  • a first time Ta elapses from the time when the information transmission unit 145 executes the process of step 2002.
  • the information transmitting unit 145 estimates the distortion amount as described above, and determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied (2007). In this way, the information transmitting section 145 estimates the distortion amount each time the first time Ta elapses. If the third condition is satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission related information to the second device 820 . On the other hand, if the third condition is not satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 does not transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
  • the above configuration has the following effects.
  • the first device 810 feeds back the transmission-related information to the second device 820 when the third condition is met (ie, when the amount of distortion is relatively large).
  • the first device 810 can feed back transmission-related information to the second device 820 in appropriate circumstances without a first indication signal from the second device 820 .
  • the information transmitting section 145 may estimate the amount of distortion each time the first device 810 receives the second signal.
  • FIG. 21 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the processing flow of wireless communication apparatus 1700. As shown in FIG.
  • Steps 2101 to 2107 in FIG. 21 and steps 1901 to 1907 in FIG. 19 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted.
  • the information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 each time the period Tp elapses in response to the first instruction signal (2101) including information about the period Tp.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 determines that the first condition is satisfied (2108).
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal including information about the number of times Nk to the first device 810 (2109).
  • Steps 2110 to 2117 in FIG. 21 and steps 1807 to 1814 in FIG. 18 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted.
  • steps 2110 to 2117 the time interval at which the first device 810 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 is shorter than the period Tp.
  • the instruction transmitting section 114 transmits to the first device 810 a first instruction signal including information about the period Tp.
  • the information transmitting section 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 every time the cycle Tp elapses.
  • the above configuration has the following effects.
  • the first condition that is, when the approximation error is large
  • the first device 810 feeds back the transmission-related information to the second device 820 at relatively short intervals.
  • the second device 820 can quickly reflect the current state of the transmission path 120 to the first NN 300 and the second NN 600 .
  • the second condition is satisfied (that is, if the approximation error is small)
  • the need to update the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 is low.
  • the first device 810 feeds back transmission-related information to the second device 820 with a relatively long period Tp.
  • the processing load on the second device 820 can be suppressed.
  • FIG. 22 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the processing flow of wireless communication apparatus 1700. As shown in FIG.
  • Steps 2201 to 2205 in FIG. 22 and steps 2001 to 2005 in FIG. 20 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 determines that the first condition is satisfied (2206).
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal including information about the number of times Nk to the first device 810 (2207).
  • Steps 2208 to 2215 in FIG. 22 and steps 1807 to 1814 in FIG. 18 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted.
  • the first device 810 sends transmission-related information to the second device 820 each time the second device 820 sends a second signal to the first device 810.
  • FIG. Therefore, the time interval for the first device 810 to send the transmission-related information to the second device 820 is relatively short.
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2216).
  • the information transmitting unit 145 estimates the distortion amount as described above, and determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied (2217).
  • the information transmitting section 145 estimates the amount of distortion and determines whether the third condition is satisfied. If the third condition is satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission related information to the second device 820 . In this case, as described above, the instruction transmission unit 114 determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied.
  • the information transmitting section 145 does not transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
  • the above configuration has the following effects.
  • the first device 810 feeds back transmission-related information to the second device 820 only when the third condition is met (ie, when the amount of distortion is relatively large).
  • the second device 820 performs learning processing and determines whether the first condition is satisfied only when the first device 810 feeds back the transmission-related information.
  • the processing load on the second device 820 can be suppressed.
  • the second device 820 when the first condition is satisfied (that is, when the approximation error is large), the second device 820 sends the transmission-related information to the second device 820 at relatively short intervals. Instruct the first device 810 to feed back. In the second stage, the second device 820 can reflect the current state of the transmission path 120 (in particular, information on transmission distortion) to the first NN 300 and the second NN 600 in a relatively short cycle. .
  • the first device 810 and the second device 820 may be connected by one communication path (for example, one optical fiber). Transmission of the second signal may occur over an optical fiber and transmission of the transmission-related information may occur over the same optical fiber.
  • the first device 810 and the second device 820 may be configured to communicate with each other using an optical wavelength division multiplexing scheme.
  • Optical wavelength division multiplexing is a well-known technology, and is a method of transmitting optical signals with different wavelengths over one optical fiber.
  • the first device 810 and the second device 820 may be configured to communicate with each other using a polarization multiplexing scheme.
  • Polarization multiplexing is a well-known technique, and is a method of transmitting horizontally polarized waves vibrating in the horizontal direction and vertically polarized waves in the vertical direction over one optical fiber.
  • the first device 810 and the second device 820 may be configured to communicate with each other using a method of time multiplexing.
  • Time-multiplexed communication is a well-known technology, and is a method of sequentially transmitting a plurality of signals over one optical fiber so that the signals do not overlap on the time axis.
  • the optical fiber may be a multi-core fiber having multiple cores.
  • the first device 810 and the second device 820 may be configured to communicate with each other using a scheme of spatial multiplexing. Spatial multiplex communication is a well-known technology, and is a method of transmitting different signals for each core.
  • Wireless communication device 2300 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 .
  • Radio communication apparatus 2300 has a configuration for outputting N types of signals.
  • N is an integer of 2 or more.
  • the first device 810 includes multiple antennas 141-1 to 141-N, multiple BPFs 142-1 to 142-N, and multiple amplifiers 143-1 to 143-N.
  • the second device 820 comprises a plurality of delta-sigma modulating sections 111-1 to 111-N. Furthermore, the first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via a plurality of first communication paths 131-1 to 131-N. A plurality of delta-sigma modulation sections 111-1 to 111-N are connected to a plurality of antennas 141-1 to 141-N via a plurality of first communication paths 131-1 to 131-N, respectively. For example, delta-sigma modulator 111-N is connected to antenna 141-N via first communication path 131-N, BPF 142-N and amplifier 143-N.
  • the first device 810 has a switch 146 .
  • the switch 146 can switch the signal to be output to the modulating section 144 .
  • the first device 810 can feed back transmission-related information (the third signal in this example) to the second device 820 for each of the N types of second signals. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the transmission distortion that occurs in the transmission process of each of the N kinds of second signals.
  • Wireless communication device 2400 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 .
  • Wireless communication device 2400 has a transmission function and a reception function.
  • the link in which signals are transmitted from the second device 820 to the terminal device 190 via the first device 810 may be referred to as a "downlink”.
  • Signals transmitted on the downlink are sometimes referred to as “downlink signals.”
  • the link in which signals are transmitted from the terminal device 190 through the first device 810 to the second device 820 is sometimes called "uplink".
  • Signals transmitted on the uplink are sometimes referred to as “uplink signals.”
  • the second device 820 transmits downlink signals to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 .
  • First device 810 transmits uplink signals to second device 820 over second communication path 132 .
  • the first device 810 has an antenna switch 147 .
  • the antenna switch 147 has a first terminal 147a connected to the amplifier 143, a second terminal 147b connected to the antenna 141, and a third terminal 147c connected to a low noise amplifier (LNA) 148.
  • LNA low noise amplifier
  • the antenna switch 147 can operate in three modes: transmission mode, reception mode and feedback mode.
  • the first terminal 147a and the second terminal 147b are connected. Therefore, a downlink signal is output from the antenna 141 .
  • the second terminal 147b and the third terminal 147c are connected. Accordingly, an uplink signal is transmitted to the second device 820 via the LNA 148 , the modulator 144 , the information transmitter 145 and the second communication path 132 .
  • the second device 820 uses a reception function (not shown) to perform predetermined processing on the uplink signal.
  • the first terminal 147a and the third terminal 147c are connected. Therefore, the downlink signal is sent to the information transmission section 145 via the LNA 148 and modulation section 144 .
  • the information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 at a predetermined timing.
  • the transmission-related information in this example is information about downlink signals to be transmitted from the first device 810 to the terminal device 190 .
  • the transmission-related information is a signal (that is, a third signal) obtained by frequency-converting (down-converting) the downlink signal through the modulation section 144 .
  • the radio communication apparatus 2400 may transmit downlink signals and receive uplink signals using a Time Division Duplex (TDD) scheme.
  • TDD is a scheme in which uplink signals and downlink signals are alternately transmitted in different slots. Note that the above slots may also be referred to as "time slots”.
  • instruction transmission section 114 When wireless communication device 2400 operates in the TDD scheme, instruction transmission section 114 operates as follows. For uplink slots, the second communication path 132 is used for transmission of uplink signals, while the first communication path 131 is not used. Therefore, the instruction transmitter 114 transmits the first instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 in the uplink slot. The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a second instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 in an uplink slot.
  • the information transmission unit 145 operates as follows. For downlink slots, the first communication path 131 is used for transmission of downlink signals, while the second communication path 132 is not used. Therefore, the information transmitter 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 in the downlink slot.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the configuration of wireless communication apparatus 2500. As shown in FIG. Wireless communication device 2500 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 . The first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the first communication path 131 .
  • a first device 810 includes an antenna 141 , a BPF 142 , an amplifier 143 , an antenna 150 , a frequency conversion section 151 , a second modulation section 152 and a third modulation section 153 .
  • Third modulating section 153 has the same configuration as modulating section 144 .
  • the third modulation section 153 processes the analog signal (corresponding to the downlink signal) amplified by the amplifier 143 as described above, and outputs the third signal (including the I signal and the Q signal).
  • the second modulating section 152 receives the output of the third modulating section 153 .
  • the second modulating section 152 performs signal modulation processing on the output of the third modulating section 153 .
  • a general modulation scheme may be used as the signal modulation process.
  • signal modulation processing may be single carrier modulation or OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing).
  • the frequency conversion section 151 receives the output of the second modulation section 152 .
  • the frequency conversion section 151 up-converts the output of the second modulation section 152 . In this case, frequency conversion section 151 up-converts the output of second modulation section 152 to frequency f1 different from frequency f0.
  • the output of frequency converter 151 is transmitted via antenna 150 .
  • Second device 820 includes delta-sigma modulation section 111 , NN processing section 112 , NN learning section 113 , antenna 115 , demodulation section 117 and modulation section 144 .
  • the second device 820 receives the signal output from the antenna 150 of the first device 810 via the antenna 115 .
  • Modulator 144 processes the received signal as described above.
  • Demodulator 117 demodulates the output of modulator 144 .
  • the demodulation method of demodulator 117 is a method corresponding to the modulation method of second modulator 152 .
  • Demodulator 117 outputs the demodulated third signal (including the I signal and Q signal) to NN learning section 113 .
  • the above configuration has the following effects.
  • the first device 810 can feed back transmission-related information to the second device 820 via spatial transmission.
  • the transmission-related information in this example is information about downlink signals to be transmitted from the first device 810 to the terminal device 190 . Therefore, the second device 820 can update the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 using the transmission related information. As a result, transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal can be suppressed.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the configuration of wireless communication apparatus 2600.
  • Wireless communication device 2600 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 .
  • the first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the first communication path 131 .
  • the first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the second communication path 132 .
  • First device 810 includes antenna 141 , BPF 142 , amplifier 143 , modulation section 144 , information transmission section 145 , digital restoration section 149 , and NN learning section 113 .
  • the digital restoration unit 149 receives the output of the first communication path 131 .
  • the digital restoration unit 149 converts the output of the first communication path 131 into a 1-bit digital signal.
  • the transmission distortion included in the output of the first communication path 131 is shaped and a digital signal is output.
  • the digital restoration unit 149 converts the restored signal of the second signal from the third signal (in this example, the signal generated through the process in which the second signal passes through the first communication path 131). to generate
  • a restored signal of the second signal may be referred to as a "fifth signal”.
  • the NN learning unit 113 receives the fifth signal (restored second signal) and the third signal output by the modulation unit 144 (that is, the second signal is the first communication path 131, the BPF 142, A first parameter of the first NN 300 and a second parameter of the second NN 600 are calculated using the third signal generated through the process of passing through the amplifier 143 and the modulator 144 .
  • the NN learning unit 113 updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 to the calculated second parameter. Further, NN learning section 113 outputs the calculated first parameter to information transmitting section 145 .
  • Information transmitter 145 transmits the first parameter to second device 820 via second communication path 132 . Therefore, the transmission-related information in this example is the first parameter.
  • the first parameter is information used in the first NN 300 to output an approximation of the signal generated in the process of transmitting the second signal.
  • the first parameter is therefore information about the transmission between the first device 810 and the second device 820 .
  • the first parameter is also used to output an approximation of the transmission distortion that occurs during the transmission process of the second signal, so that the first parameter is information about the transmission distortion. It can also be said that
  • the second device 820 comprises a delta-sigma modulation section 111 , an NN processing section 112 and an instruction transmission section 114 .
  • Delta-sigma modulator 111 transmits the second signal to first device 810 via first communication path 131 .
  • Instruction transmitting unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to first device 810 via first communication path 131 .
  • Instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a second instruction signal to first device 810 via first communication path 131 .
  • NN processing unit 112 receives the first parameter via second communication path 132 .
  • the NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter.
  • FIG. 27 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 2600. As shown in FIG. 27
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to the first device 810 (2701).
  • the first indication signal contains information about the number of times Nk.
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2702).
  • the NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2703).
  • the NN learning unit 113 updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 to the calculated second parameter.
  • the information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information (in this example, the first parameter) to the second device 820 (2704). This is the first transmission of the transmission-related information from the time when the first device 810 received the first instruction signal. A second device 820 receives the transmission related information.
  • the NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter.
  • the information transmitting unit 145 determines whether the second condition is satisfied.
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2705).
  • the NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2706).
  • the information transmission unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 (2707). This is the Nj-th transmission of the transmission-related information from when the first device 810 received the first instruction signal. Note that Nj ⁇ Nk.
  • the information transmission unit 145 determines that the second condition is satisfied (2708).
  • the information transmission unit 145 transmits the notification to the second device 820 (2709). This notification is for notifying the second device 820 that the second condition has been met.
  • instruction transmitting section 114 transmits a second instruction signal to first device 810 (2710). As a result, the information transmitting unit 145 stops transmitting transmission-related information.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal including information about the number of times Nk to the first device 810 (2711).
  • the above configuration has the following effects.
  • the first device 810 repeatedly feeds back the transmission-related information (first parameter) to the second device 820 until the second condition is met.
  • the second device 820 can update the first parameter of the first NN 300 with the transmission related information.
  • transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal can be suppressed.
  • a distributed MIMO system can be implemented that increases the number of simultaneous connections and transmission capacity.
  • FIG. 28 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 2600.
  • FIG. 28 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 2600.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to the first device 810 (2801).
  • the first signal contains information about the period Tp.
  • the period Tp may be defined by the learning period, as described above. Furthermore, the period Tp may be defined by frames, subframes or slots as described above.
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2802).
  • the NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2803).
  • the NN learning unit 113 updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 to the calculated second parameter.
  • the information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information (in this example, the first parameter) to the second device 820 (2804).
  • a second device 820 receives the transmission related information.
  • the NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter.
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 repeatedly transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2805).
  • a cycle Tp has passed since the NN learning unit 113 executed the process of step 2803 .
  • the NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2806).
  • the information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 (2807).
  • the above configuration has the following effects.
  • the first device 810 periodically feeds back transmission related information (first parameter) to the second device 820 .
  • the second device 820 can periodically update the first parameter of the first NN 300 with the transmission related information.
  • the NN learning unit 113 may calculate the first parameter and the second parameter each time the first device 810 receives the second signal.
  • the information transmitting section 145 may transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 every time the cycle Tp elapses.
  • FIG. 29 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication device 2600 .
  • the delta-sigma modulation section 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2901).
  • the NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2902).
  • NN learning section 113 outputs the approximation error to information transmitting section 145 .
  • the information transmitter 145 uses the approximation error to determine whether the first condition is satisfied. In this example, the information transmitting section 145 determines that the first condition is satisfied (2903). In this case, the information transmitting section 145 transmits the transmission-related information (the first parameter in this example) to the second device 820 (2904).
  • the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 repeatedly transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2905).
  • the NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2906).
  • the information transmitting unit 145 determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. If the first condition is satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission related information to the second device 820 . On the other hand, if the first condition is not satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 does not transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
  • the first device 810 can send the transmission-related information (the first parameter) to the second device 820 when the first condition is satisfied (ie, the approximation error is large).
  • FIG. 30 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 2600. As shown in FIG.
  • Steps 3001 to 3009 in FIG. 30 and steps 2701 to 2709 in FIG. 27 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted.
  • steps 3001 to 3009 the time interval at which the first device 810 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 is shorter than the period Tp.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 When the instruction transmission unit 114 receives the notification in step 3009, the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal including the period Tp to the first device 810 (3010). Steps 3011 to 3016 in FIG. 30 and steps 2802 to 2807 in FIG. 28 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted.
  • First device 810 first transmits transmission-related information (first parameter) to second device 820 in a relatively short cycle.
  • the second device 820 can quickly reflect the state of the transmission path 120 to the first NN 300 .
  • the second condition is met (that is, if the approximation error is small)
  • the necessity of updating the first parameter of the first NN 300 is low.
  • the first device 810 feeds back transmission-related information to the second device 820 with a relatively long period Tp.
  • information transmitting section 145 may determine whether or not the first condition is satisfied. If the first condition is satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission related information to the second device 820 . On the other hand, if the first condition is not satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 does not transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 . According to this configuration, the first device 810 can feed back transmission-related information to the second device 820 even in the middle of the cycle Tp when the approximation error becomes large.
  • the wireless communication device 2600 may have the configuration of the seventh modification of the second embodiment. That is, radio communication apparatus 2600 may operate in the TDD scheme.
  • the instruction transmission unit 114 operates as follows. The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 in an uplink slot. The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a second instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 in an uplink slot.
  • the information transmission unit 145 operates as follows.
  • the information transmitting unit 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 in downlink slots.
  • wireless communication device 2601 The components of wireless communication device 2601 are the same as those of wireless communication device 2600 in FIG.
  • the output of the first communication path 131 is directly input to the digital restoration section 149 .
  • a fifth signal (restored second signal) output by the digital reconstruction unit 149 is input to the BPF 142 .
  • the fifth signal is input to NN learning section 113 via BPF 142 , amplifier 143 and modulation section 144 . Therefore, the NN learning unit 113 uses the "fifth signal” and the "third signal generated through the process in which the fifth signal passes through the BPF 142, the amplifier 143, and the modulation unit 144", A first parameter and a second parameter are calculated.
  • first device 810 and the second device 820 of this example may operate according to any one of the sequences in FIGS. 27-30.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a configuration of wireless communication apparatus 3100.
  • Wireless communication device 3100 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 .
  • the first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the first communication path 131 .
  • the first device 810 includes an antenna 141, a BPF 142, an amplifier 143, a modulation section 144, an information transmission section 145, a digital restoration section 149, an NN learning section 113, an antenna 150, and a frequency conversion section 151. , and a second modulation unit 152 .
  • the second device 820 includes a delta-sigma modulation section 111, an NN processing section 112, an instruction transmission section 114, an antenna 115, a modulation section 116, and a demodulation section 117.
  • the first device 810 transmits transmission-related information (first parameter) to the second device 820 via the antenna 150 .
  • a second device 820 receives the transmission related information via the antenna 115 . The operation of the first device 810 and the operation of the second device 820 will be described below.
  • the second modulation unit 152 receives the output (first parameter) of the NN learning unit 113.
  • Second modulation section 152 performs signal modulation processing on the output of NN learning section 113 .
  • a general modulation scheme may be used as the signal modulation process. For example, signal modulation processing such as single carrier modulation or OFDM may be used.
  • the frequency conversion section 151 receives the output of the second modulation section 152 .
  • the frequency conversion section 151 up-converts the output of the second modulation section 152 . In this case, frequency conversion section 151 up-converts the output of second modulation section 152 to frequency f1 different from frequency f0.
  • Information transmitting section 145 receives the output of frequency converting section 151 .
  • Information transmitter 145 transmits transmission-related information via antenna 150 .
  • the transmission-related information in this example is the output of the frequency converter 151 and is the first parameter.
  • a second device 820 receives the signal output from the antenna 150 via the antenna 115 .
  • the modulation section 116 down-converts the received signal and outputs the I signal and the Q signal.
  • the demodulator 117 demodulates the I signal and the Q signal to their original digital values (first parameters).
  • the demodulation method of demodulator 117 is a method corresponding to the modulation method of second modulator 152 .
  • the demodulator 117 outputs the first parameter to the NN processor 112 .
  • NN processing unit 112 receives the first parameter.
  • the NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter.
  • first device 810 and the second device 820 may operate according to any sequence shown in FIGS.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the configuration of wireless communication apparatus 3200.
  • the wireless communication device 3200 comprises a first radio access network device 3210 and a second radio access network device 3220 .
  • first radio access network device 3210 will be referred to as “first device 3210”
  • second radio access network device 3220 will be referred to as “second device 3220”.
  • the first device 3210 is a device that performs processing related to the first physical layer.
  • the second device 3220 is a device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the configuration of the first device 3210.
  • the first device 3210 comprises an acquisition section 3211 and a transmission section 3212 .
  • Acquisition unit 3211 acquires information on transmission between first device 3210 and second device 3220 .
  • transmission related information information about transmission between the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 is simply referred to as "transmission related information”.
  • the transmitter 3212 transmits the transmission related information to the second device 3220 .
  • the components 3211-3212 of the first device 3210 may be implemented with one or more processors and memory.
  • the one or more processors may include, for example, one or more of a CPU, MPU and microcontroller.
  • the memory may include volatile memory and non-volatile memory.
  • the memory may store program code (instructions).
  • One or more processors may implement the functionality of the first device 3210 by executing program code stored in memory.
  • first device 3210 may operate in the same manner as the first device 810 described above.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of the second device 3220.
  • the second device 3220 comprises a receiver 3221 and a processor 3222 .
  • the receiver 3221 receives transmission-related information from the first device 3210 .
  • the processing unit 3222 performs processing related to communication with the first device 3210 using the transmission-related information.
  • the components 3221-3222 of the second device 3220 may be implemented with one or more processors and memory.
  • the one or more processors may include, for example, one or more of a CPU, MPU and microcontroller.
  • the memory may include volatile memory and non-volatile memory.
  • the memory may store program code (instructions).
  • One or more processors may implement the functionality of the second device 3220 by executing program code stored in memory.
  • the second device 3220 may operate in the same manner as the second device 820 described above.
  • FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of the first device 3210 .
  • the acquisition unit 3211 acquires transmission-related information (3501).
  • the transmitter 3212 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 3220 (3502).
  • FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of the second device 3220.
  • the receiver 3221 receives transmission-related information from the first device 3210 (3601).
  • the processing unit 3222 uses the transmission-related information to perform processing related to communication with the first device 3210 (3602).
  • the above configuration improves transmission between the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 by exchanging transmission related information between the first device 3210 and the second device 3220. be able to.
  • the transmission-related information may be information generated during the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second device 3220 to the first device 3210.
  • the first device 3210 may be configured to transmit the signal transmitted from the second device 3220 to the first device 3210 as a downlink signal to the terminal device (not shown).
  • the transmission related information may be information about downlink signals to be transmitted from the first device 3210 to the terminal device.
  • the transmission-related information may be a signal obtained by frequency-converting the downlink signal.
  • the transmission-related information may include information about distortion caused during the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second device 3220 to the first device 3210.
  • the transmission related information may be parameters of a neural network that outputs an approximation of the signal generated through at least part of the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second device 3220 to the first device 3210. .
  • the transmission related information may be the parameters of the first NN 300 in the above embodiments.
  • the transmission unit 3212 may control transmission of transmission-related information according to the instruction signal transmitted from the second device 3220.
  • the indication signal may include the first indication signal and the second indication signal in the embodiments described above.
  • the transmission unit 3212 may transmit transmission-related information to the second device 3220 when a predetermined condition regarding transmission between the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 is met.
  • the predetermined condition may be a condition regarding the amount of distortion that occurs during the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second device 3220 to the first device 3210.
  • the predetermined condition may be the first condition in the embodiment described above.
  • the predetermined condition may be the third condition in the embodiment described above.
  • the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 may be configured to operate in TDD mode.
  • the transmitter 3212 may transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 3220 in downlink slots.
  • the second device 3220 may further include a transmission unit that transmits an instruction signal regarding transmission of transmission-related information to the first device 3210.
  • the indication signal may include the first indication signal and the second indication signal in the embodiments described above.
  • the transmission unit of the second device 3220 may transmit an instruction signal to the first device 3210 when a predetermined condition regarding transmission between the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 is satisfied.
  • the predetermined conditions may include the first condition and the second condition in the embodiment described above.
  • the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 may be configured to operate in TDD mode.
  • the transmitting section of the second device 3220 may transmit an instruction signal to the first device 3210 in an uplink slot.
  • the processing related to communication with the first device 3210 may include delta-sigma modulation.
  • Processing unit 3222 may perform delta-sigma modulation using the transmission related information.
  • the processing unit 3222 may transmit the signal output by the delta-sigma modulation to the first device 3210.
  • the processing for the first physical layer may include one or more of filtering processing, amplification processing, and frequency conversion processing.
  • the processing related to the first physical layer is not limited to this example.
  • the processing related to the second physical layer may include modulation processing.
  • the modulation process may include delta-sigma modulation.
  • the processing related to the second physical layer may be other processing as long as it is higher-level processing than the processing related to the first physical layer.
  • the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 conform to the technical specifications of 3GPP and may conform to the technical specifications of the O-RAN (Open RAN) Alliance.
  • O-RAN Open RAN
  • An analog RoF system is a known system that converts an analog signal to an optical signal and transmits the optical signal over an optical fiber.
  • processing steps shown in flowcharts or sequence diagrams do not necessarily have to be executed in the order shown.
  • the processing steps may be performed in a different order than that shown, and two or more processing steps may be performed in parallel. Also, some processing steps may be deleted and further processing steps may be added.
  • the arrows in the drawings are examples showing the direction of signal (data) flow from one component to another, and do not exclude bi-directional communication between the above two components.
  • transmitting X to Y is not limited to transmitting X directly to Y, but indirectly transmitting X to Y (i.e., X transmitting to another node and X is sent from that other node to Y).
  • receiving X from Y is not limited to receiving X directly from Y, but indirectly receiving X from Y (i.e., X transmitted from Y to another node). and X is received from the other node).
  • a repeater may be placed between the first device 810 and the second device 820 .
  • a repeater may relay the transmission of the second signal and/or the transmission of the transmission related information.
  • Program codes (instructions) constituting software may be stored, for example, in a computer-readable recording medium inside or outside each device, and may be read into a memory and executed by a processor at the time of execution. Also, a non-transitory computer readable medium recording the program code may be provided.
  • a first radio access network device for processing on a first physical layer, an acquisition unit for acquiring information on transmission between the first radio access network device and a second radio access network device that performs processing on a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer; a transmitting unit configured to transmit the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device;
  • a first radio access network device comprising:
  • Appendix 4 The first radio access network apparatus according to appendix 3, wherein the information about the transmission is a signal obtained by frequency-converting the downlink signal.
  • Said information about said transmission is a neural output approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from said second radio access network device to said first radio access network device.
  • Appendix 7 The first radio access network device according to appendix 1, wherein the transmission unit controls the transmission of the information regarding the transmission according to an instruction signal transmitted from the second radio access network device.
  • said indication signal comprises a first indication signal that instructs said first radio access network device to send said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device.
  • the first indication signal includes information about a periodicity with which the first radio access network device transmits the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device.
  • the period is a training neural network that outputs an approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from the second radio access network device to the first radio access network device.
  • the first radio access network device according to clause 10, defined by a time period.
  • said indication signal comprises a second indication signal instructing said first radio access network device to stop sending said information relating to said transmission to said second radio access network device.
  • Appendix 14 The first radio access network device according to appendix 1, wherein the transmitting unit transmits the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device when a predetermined condition regarding the transmission is satisfied.
  • the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device are configured to operate in a Time Division Duplex (TDD) scheme, 16.
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • the first radio access network device according to any one of appendices 1 to 15, wherein said transmitting unit transmits said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device in a downlink slot.
  • a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer, a receiving unit for receiving information on transmission between a first radio access network device that performs processing related to the first physical layer and the second radio access network device; a processing unit that performs processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission; a second radio access network device comprising:
  • the second radio access network device according to claim 17, further comprising: a transmitting unit configured to transmit an indication signal regarding transmission of said information regarding said transmission to said first radio access network device.
  • the predetermined condition is a condition regarding the amount of distortion caused in the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second radio access network device to the first radio access network device, 24.
  • said indication signal comprises a first indication signal for instructing said first radio access network device to send said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device.
  • a second radio access network device A second radio access network device.
  • the period is a training neural network that outputs an approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from the second radio access network device to the first radio access network device. 29.
  • said indication signal comprises a second indication signal instructing said first radio access network device to stop sending said information relating to said transmission to said second radio access network device.
  • the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device are configured to operate in a Time Division Duplex (TDD) scheme, 32.
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • the second radio access network device according to any one of appendices 23 to 31, wherein said transmitting unit transmits said instruction signal to said first radio access network device in an uplink slot.
  • a method in a first radio access network device for processing on a first physical layer comprising: obtaining information on transmission between the first radio access network device and a second radio access network device performing processing on a second physical layer above the first physical layer; sending said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device; method including.
  • a method in a second radio access network device for processing on a second physical layer above the first physical layer comprising: receiving information about transmissions between a first radio access network device performing processing for the first physical layer and the second radio access network device; performing processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission; method including.
  • Appendix 39 relating to transmission between a first radio access network device performing processing relating to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device performing processing relating to a second physical layer higher than said first physical layer receiving information; performing processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission;
  • a computer-readable non-transitory recording medium that records a program that causes a processor to execute
  • Appropriate information can be sent or received to improve the transmission between the two communication devices.
  • delta-sigma modulation device 111 delta-sigma modulation unit 112: neural network processing unit 113: neural network learning unit 810: first device 820: second device 3210: first radio access network device 3220: second Radio access network equipment

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Transmitters (AREA)

Abstract

[Problem] To transmit or receive information in order to improve transmission between two communication devices. [Solution] First wireless access network devices (810, 3210) obtain information about transmission between the first wireless access network devices and second wireless access network devices (820, 3220), and transmit the information about transmission to the second wireless access network devices. The second wireless access network devices receive the information about transmission, and execute processing pertaining to communication with the first wireless access network devices by using said information about transmission.

Description

無線アクセスネットワーク装置、無線通信装置、方法及び記録媒体RADIO ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM
 本開示は、無線アクセスネットワーク装置、無線通信装置、方法及び記録媒体に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a radio access network device, radio communication device, method and recording medium.
 無線通信の分野において、トラフィックの増大に対処するために、高速通信を実現するための技術の開発が進んでいる。通常、高速通信を実現するために、無線通信装置は、高速で且つ高精度なDAC(Digital-to-Analog Converter)を備える必要がある。しかし、このような装置の消費電力は大きくなるという課題がある。 In the field of wireless communication, technology development is progressing to achieve high-speed communication in order to cope with the increase in traffic. In order to achieve high-speed communication, a wireless communication device usually needs to be equipped with a high-speed and high-precision DAC (Digital-to-Analog Converter). However, there is a problem that the power consumption of such a device increases.
 この課題を解決するために、デルタシグマ変調が使用される場合がある(例えば、特許文献1、非特許文献1及び非特許文献2を参照)。デルタシグマ変調は、入力信号としてのアナログ信号を量子化信号(パルス列)に変換する処理である。デルタシグマ変調は、DACの分解能の要求を(場合によっては1ビットまで)下げることができる。これにより、無線通信装置の消費電力を低減させることができる。 To solve this problem, delta-sigma modulation may be used (see, for example, Patent Document 1, Non-Patent Document 1, and Non-Patent Document 2). Delta-sigma modulation is a process of converting an analog signal as an input signal into a quantized signal (pulse train). Delta-sigma modulation can reduce the resolution requirements of the DAC (potentially down to 1 bit). Thereby, the power consumption of the wireless communication device can be reduced.
 一方、無線通信装置において、無線アクセスネットワーク装置の複数の機能が物理的に離れた2つの通信装置に分割される構成が知られている。例えば、基地局は、ベースバンドユニット(Base Band Unit:BBU)及びリモートユニット(Remote Unit:RU)に分割される。なお、RUは、RRU(Remote Radio Unit)、RRH(Remote Radio Head)又はRAU(Remote Antenna Unit)と称呼されてもよい。BBUとRUとは通信経路(例えば、光ファイバ)を介して接続される。この構成において、BBUとRUとの間の信号の伝送は、RoF(Radio over Fiber)技術が使用される。 On the other hand, in radio communication devices, a configuration is known in which a plurality of functions of a radio access network device are divided into two physically separated communication devices. For example, a base station is divided into a Base Band Unit (BBU) and a Remote Unit (RU). The RU may also be called RRU (Remote Radio Unit), RRH (Remote Radio Head), or RAU (Remote Antenna Unit). The BBU and RU are connected via a communication path (for example, optical fiber). In this configuration, RoF (Radio over Fiber) technology is used for signal transmission between the BBU and RU.
 近年、デルタシグマ変調及びRoF技術を使用したシステムが検討されている(例えば、非特許文献3を参照)。以降において、このようなシステムにおいては、デルタシグマ変調によって出力されたパルス列が、光ファイバを介してBBUからRUへと送信される。この場合、RUは、パルス列を、例えば、アナログのバンドパスフィルタ(BPF)を通して、デルタシグマ変調の前の元のアナログ信号へと復元する。RUがDACを備える必要がないので、RUの消費電力を低減させることができる。 In recent years, systems using delta-sigma modulation and RoF technology have been studied (see, for example, Non-Patent Document 3). Hereinafter, in such a system, a pulse train output by delta-sigma modulation is transmitted from the BBU to the RU via an optical fiber. In this case, the RU restores the pulse train to the original analog signal before delta-sigma modulation, for example through an analog bandpass filter (BPF). Since the RU does not need to be equipped with a DAC, the power consumption of the RU can be reduced.
国際公開第2016/103981号明細書International Publication No. 2016/103981
 ところで、非特許文献1に記載されているように、デルタシグマ変調を用いる構成において、波形に生じる歪みに起因して、スペクトラムリーク(spectrum leakage)という現象が生じることが知られている。ここで、スペクトラムリークとは、所望の周波数帯域の周辺の帯域(即ち、所望の周波数帯域以外の帯域)の信号成分が生じる現象である。スペクトラムリークに起因してRUから出力される信号の品質が低下する。上記の歪みを抑えるためには、2つの通信装置(この例では、BBU及びRU)の間で適切な情報をやり取りすることが求められる。 By the way, as described in Non-Patent Document 1, it is known that in a configuration using delta-sigma modulation, a phenomenon called spectrum leakage occurs due to waveform distortion. Here, the spectrum leak is a phenomenon in which signal components in bands around the desired frequency band (that is, bands other than the desired frequency band) occur. The quality of the signal output from the RU is degraded due to spectrum leakage. In order to suppress the above distortion, it is required to exchange appropriate information between the two communication devices (BBU and RU in this example).
 本開示は、2つの通信装置の間の伝送を改善するための情報を送信又は受信する技術を提供する。 This disclosure provides techniques for sending or receiving information to improve transmission between two communication devices.
 1つ以上の実施形態において、第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置が提供される。前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得する取得部と、前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する送信部と、を備える。 In one or more embodiments, a first radio access network device is provided that performs processing for a first physical layer. The first radio access network device is between the first radio access network device and a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer. an obtaining unit for obtaining information about transmission; and a transmitting unit for transmitting said information about said transmission to said second radio access network device.
 1つ以上の実施形態において、第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置が提供される。前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、前記第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を受信する受信部と、前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を行う処理部と、を備える。 In one or more embodiments, a second radio access network device is provided that performs processing for a second physical layer above the first physical layer. The second radio access network device includes: a first radio access network device that performs processing related to the first physical layer; and a receiving unit that receives information related to transmission between the second radio access network device. and a processing unit that performs processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission.
 1つ以上の実施形態において、無線通信装置が提供される。前記無線通信装置は、第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、を備える。前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得し、前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する。前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、前記伝送に関する前記情報を受信し、前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を実行する。 In one or more embodiments, a wireless communication device is provided. The radio communication device includes a first radio access network device that performs processing related to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer. And prepare. The first radio access network device obtains information regarding transmissions between the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device, and transmits the information regarding the transmissions to the second radio access network device. Send to a network device. The second radio access network device receives the information regarding the transmission and uses the information regarding the transmission to perform processing relating to communication with the first radio access network device.
 1つ以上の実施形態において、第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置における方法が提供される。前記方法は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得することと、前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信することと、を含む。 In one or more embodiments, a method is provided in a first radio access network device that performs processing for a first physical layer. The method obtains information about transmissions between the first radio access network device and a second radio access network device performing processing on a second physical layer above the first physical layer. and sending said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device.
 1つ以上の実施形態において、第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置における方法が提供される。前記方法は、前記第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を受信することと、前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を行うことと、を含む。 In one or more embodiments, a method is provided in a second radio access network device for processing for a second physical layer above the first physical layer. The method comprises: receiving information regarding a transmission between a first radio access network device performing processing for the first physical layer and the second radio access network device; using to perform processing related to communication with the first radio access network device.
 1つ以上の実施形態において、コンピュータに読み取り可能な非一時的記録媒体が提供される。前記非一時的記録媒体は、第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得することと、前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信することと、をプロセッサに実行させるプログラムを記録している。 In one or more embodiments, a computer-readable non-transitory recording medium is provided. The non-temporary recording medium includes a first radio access network device that performs processing related to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer. A program is recorded which causes a processor to obtain information regarding transmissions to and from a network device and to transmit said information regarding said transmissions to said second radio access network device.
 1つ以上の実施形態において、コンピュータに読み取り可能な非一時的記録媒体が提供される。前記非一時的記録媒体は、第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を受信することと、前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を行うことと、をプロセッサに実行させるプログラムを記録している。 In one or more embodiments, a computer-readable non-transitory recording medium is provided. The non-temporary recording medium includes a first radio access network device that performs processing related to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer. recording a program for causing a processor to receive information regarding transmission to and from a network device and to perform processing regarding communication with said first radio access network device using said information regarding said transmission; are doing.
 上記の構成によれば、2つの装置(第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置及び第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置)の間の伝送を改善するための情報を送信又は受信することが可能となる。上記以外の課題、構成及び効果は、以下の実施形態の説明により明らかにされる。 According to the above arrangement, it is possible to send or receive information for improving the transmission between two devices (the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device). Problems, configurations, and effects other than those described above will be clarified by the following description of the embodiments.
第1実施形態に係る無線通信装置の概略構成を示す図である。1 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a wireless communication device according to a first embodiment; FIG. 第1実施形態に係るデルタシグマ変調部の構成を示す図である。4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a delta-sigma modulation section according to the first embodiment; FIG. 第1実施形態に係るニューラルネットワーク処理部の構成を示す図である。3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a neural network processing unit according to the first embodiment; FIG. 第1実施形態に係るニューラルネットワーク学習部の構成を示す図である。3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a neural network learning unit according to the first embodiment; FIG. 第1実施形態に係る変調部の構成を示す図である。4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a modulating section according to the first embodiment; FIG. 第1実施形態に係る伝送モデルの構築の流れを説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the flow of construction|assembly of the transmission model which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態に係るデルタシグマ変調装置の処理の流れを示すフローチャートである。4 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of the delta-sigma modulation device according to the first embodiment; 第1実施形態に係る無線通信装置の具体的構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a concrete structure of the radio|wireless communication apparatus which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態に係る第1の装置のハードウェア構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the hardware constitutions of the 1st apparatus based on 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態に係る第2の装置のハードウェア構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the hardware constitutions of the 2nd apparatus based on 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態に係る無線通信装置の処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。4 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the first embodiment; FIG. 変形例に係るデルタシグマ変調部の構成を示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration of a delta-sigma modulation section according to a modification; 変形例に係る第1のニューラルネットワークの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the 1st neural network which concerns on a modification. 変形例に係る第1のニューラルネットワークの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the 1st neural network which concerns on a modification. 変形例に係るデルタシグマ変調装置の処理の流れを示すフローチャートである。9 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of a delta-sigma modulation device according to a modification; 変形例に係るニューラルネットワーク学習部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the neural network learning part which concerns on a modification. 第2実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the configuration of a wireless communication device according to a second embodiment; 第2実施形態に係る無線通信装置の処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the second embodiment; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a radio communication device according to a modification; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a radio communication device according to a modification; 第3実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the configuration of a wireless communication device according to a third embodiment; FIG. 第4実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of a wireless communication device according to a fourth embodiment; FIG. 第4実施形態に係る無線通信装置の処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the fourth embodiment; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の処理の流れを示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing of the wireless communication device according to the modification; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a radio communication device according to a modification; 変形例に係る無線通信装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a radio communication device according to a modification; 第5実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of a wireless communication device according to a fifth embodiment; 第5実施形態に係る第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of a first radio access network device according to the fifth embodiment; 第5実施形態に係る第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of a second radio access network device according to the fifth embodiment; 第5実施形態に係る第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置の処理の流れを示すフローチャートである。FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of the first radio access network device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 第5実施形態に係る第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置の処理の流れを示すフローチャートである。FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of the second radio access network device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. デルタシグマ変調及びRoF技術を使用したシステムの一例である。1 is an example of a system using delta-sigma modulation and RoF technology; デルタシグマ変調及びRoF技術を使用したシステムの一例である。1 is an example of a system using delta-sigma modulation and RoF technology;
 以下、添付の図面を参照して1以上の実施形態を説明する。なお、本明細書及び図面において、同様に説明されることが可能な要素については、同一の符号を付することにより重複説明が省略される。 One or more embodiments are described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the present specification and drawings, elements that can be described in the same manner are denoted by the same reference numerals, thereby omitting redundant description.
 説明は、以下の順序で行われる。
 1.実施形態の概要
 2.第1実施形態
  2-1.無線通信装置の概略構成
  2-2.デルタシグマ変調部の構成
  2-3.ニューラルネットワーク処理部の構成
  2-4.ニューラルネットワーク学習部の構成の概要
  2-5.通信経路の構成
  2-6.バンドパスフィルタの構成
  2-7.変調部の構成
  2-8.ニューラルネットワーク学習部の具体的構成
  2-9.デルタシグマ変調装置の処理の流れ
  2-10.無線通信装置の具体的構成例
  2-11.第1の装置の構成
  2-12.第2の装置の構成
  2-13.無線通信装置の処理の流れ
  2-14.変形例
 3.第2実施形態
  3-1.無線通信装置の概略構成
  3-2.第1の装置の構成
  3-3.第2の装置の構成
  3-4.無線通信装置の処理の流れの概要
  3-5.無線通信装置の処理の流れ
  3-6.変形例
 4.第3実施形態
  4-1.無線通信装置の概略構成
  4-2.第1の装置の構成
  4-3.第2の装置の構成
 5.第4実施形態
  5-1.無線通信装置の概略構成
  5-2.第1の装置の構成
  5-3.第2の装置の構成
  5-4.無線通信装置の処理の流れ
  5-5.変形例
 6.第5実施形態
  6-1.無線通信装置の構成
  6-2.無線通信装置の処理の流れ
  6-3.変形例
The description is given in the following order.
1. Outline of embodiment 2 . First embodiment 2-1. Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device 2-2. Configuration of delta-sigma modulation unit 2-3. Configuration of Neural Network Processing Unit 2-4. Outline of configuration of neural network learning unit 2-5. Configuration of communication path 2-6. Configuration of bandpass filter 2-7. Configuration of modulation unit 2-8. Specific Configuration of Neural Network Learning Unit 2-9. Flow of processing of delta-sigma modulator 2-10. Specific configuration example of wireless communication device 2-11. Configuration of first device 2-12. Configuration of second device 2-13. Flow of processing of wireless communication device 2-14. Modification 3. Second Embodiment 3-1. Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device 3-2. Configuration of first device 3-3. Configuration of second device 3-4. Outline of processing flow of wireless communication device 3-5. Flow of processing of wireless communication device 3-6. Modification 4. Third Embodiment 4-1. Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device 4-2. Configuration of first device 4-3. Configuration of second device 5 . Fourth Embodiment 5-1. Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device 5-2. Configuration of first device 5-3. Configuration of second device 5-4. Flow of processing of wireless communication device 5-5. Modification 6. Fifth Embodiment 6-1. Configuration of Wireless Communication Device 6-2. Flow of processing of wireless communication device 6-3. Modification
 <<1.実施形態の概要>>
 後述される1以上の実施形態の概要を説明する。
<<1. Outline of Embodiment>>
SUMMARY One or more embodiments are summarized below.
 (1)技術的課題
 図38は、デルタシグマ変調及びRoF技術を使用したシステムの一例である。このシステムは、第1の装置3710と、第2の装置3720とを備える。第1の装置3710と第2の装置3720とは光ファイバ3730を介して接続されている。
(1) Technical Problem FIG. 38 is an example of a system using delta-sigma modulation and RoF technology. The system comprises a first device 3710 and a second device 3720 . First device 3710 and second device 3720 are connected via optical fiber 3730 .
 第1の装置3710は、O/E変換部(Optic-Electric converter)3711と、バンドパスフィルタ(BPF)3712と、増幅器3713と、アンテナ3714とを備える。第2の装置3720は、デルタシグマ変調部3721と、E/O変換部(Electric-Optic converter)3722とを備える。 A first device 3710 includes an O/E converter (Optic-Electric converter) 3711 , a bandpass filter (BPF) 3712 , an amplifier 3713 and an antenna 3714 . The second device 3720 comprises a delta-sigma modulator 3721 and an E/O converter (Electric-Optic converter) 3722 .
 入力信号としてのアナログ信号3741は、デルタシグマ変調部3721を通して量子化信号(パルス列)3742に変換される。なお、このデルタシグマ変調部3721は、1入力1出力の一般的な構成であり、量子化信号(パルス列)は、デルタシグマ変調部3721の内部においてフィードバックされる。パルス列3742は、E/O変換部3722を通して光信号に変換される。光信号が、光ファイバ3730上を伝送される。その後、光信号が、O/E変換部3711を通して電気信号3743に変換される。電気信号3743は、BPF3712を通して、デルタシグマ変調の前の元のアナログ信号3745へと変換される。アナログ信号3745は、増幅器3713を用いて増幅される。増幅されたアナログ信号は、アンテナ3714から出力される。 An analog signal 3741 as an input signal is converted into a quantized signal (pulse train) 3742 through a delta-sigma modulator 3721 . The delta-sigma modulation section 3721 has a general configuration of one input and one output, and the quantized signal (pulse train) is fed back inside the delta-sigma modulation section 3721 . The pulse train 3742 is converted into an optical signal through the E/O converter 3722 . Optical signals are transmitted over optical fiber 3730 . After that, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal 3743 through the O/E converter 3711 . Electrical signal 3743 is converted through BPF 3712 to original analog signal 3745 before delta-sigma modulation. Analog signal 3745 is amplified using amplifier 3713 . The amplified analog signal is output from antenna 3714 .
 図38のシステムにおいては、理想的なデルタシグマ変調が実行される。パルス列3742の伝送過程においてパルス列3742に歪みが生じていない。その結果、スペクトラムリークが生じない。 In the system of FIG. 38, ideal delta-sigma modulation is performed. No distortion occurs in the pulse train 3742 during the transmission process of the pulse train 3742 . As a result, no spectrum leak occurs.
 図39は、デルタシグマ変調及びRoF技術を使用したシステムの一例である。このシステムにおいては、パルス列3742の伝送過程において、パルス列3742に歪みが生じる。例えば、光信号が光ファイバ3730を通過する際に歪みが生じる。このような歪みは、「光伝送歪み」と称呼される。パルス列3810は、光伝送歪みが生じた状態を表す。 FIG. 39 is an example of a system using delta-sigma modulation and RoF technology. In this system, distortion occurs in the pulse train 3742 during the transmission process of the pulse train 3742 . For example, distortion occurs as the optical signal passes through the optical fiber 3730 . Such distortion is referred to as "optical transmission distortion". A pulse train 3810 represents a state in which optical transmission distortion has occurred.
 更に、O/E変換部3711とBPF3712との間の電力反射が大きい場合にも、歪みが生じる。このような歪みは、「電気伝送歪み」と称呼される。パルス列3820は、電気伝送歪みが生じた状態を表す。以降において、光伝送歪み及び電気伝送歪みは、まとめて「伝送歪み」と称呼される。 Furthermore, distortion also occurs when the power reflection between the O/E converter 3711 and the BPF 3712 is large. Such distortion is referred to as "electrical transmission distortion". Pulse train 3820 represents a state in which electrical transmission distortion has occurred. Hereinafter, optical transmission distortion and electrical transmission distortion are collectively referred to as "transmission distortion".
 伝送歪みは、その結果として、BPF3712を介して出力されるアナログ信号3830の周波数成分に影響を与える。具体的には、上述したスペクトラムリークが生じる。これにより、アナログ信号3830のSN比(signal to noise ratio)が劣化する。このように伝送歪みに起因して信号品質が劣化するという課題がある。 As a result, the transmission distortion affects the frequency components of the analog signal 3830 output via the BPF 3712. Specifically, the above spectrum leak occurs. This degrades the signal to noise ratio of analog signal 3830 . Thus, there is a problem that the signal quality deteriorates due to transmission distortion.
 上記の課題を解決するために、2つの装置(第1の装置3710及び第2の装置3720)の間の伝送を改善するための適切な情報を送信又は受信する構成が求められる。 In order to solve the above problems, an arrangement is required to send or receive appropriate information to improve the transmission between the two devices (the first device 3710 and the second device 3720).
 (2)技術的特徴
 1以上の実施形態において、無線通信装置は、第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置とを備える。第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う装置である。第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う装置である。ここで、第1及び第2の物理レイヤは、第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置とに実装された通信プロトコルをなす複数レイヤのうち、第1層(最下位層)に含まれると捉えてもよい。
(2) Technical Features In one or more embodiments, a wireless communication device comprises a first radio access network device and a second radio access network device. The first radio access network device is a device that performs processing related to the first physical layer. The second radio access network device is a device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer. Here, the first and second physical layers are the first layer (lowest layer) among multiple layers forming the communication protocol implemented in the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device. ) can be considered to be included in
 第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得する取得部と、伝送に関する情報を第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する送信部とを備える。 The first radio access network device comprises: an obtaining unit for obtaining information about transmission between the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device; and transmitting information about the transmission to the second radio access network device. and a transmitter for transmitting.
 第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、伝送に関する情報を受信する受信部と、伝送に関する情報を用いて、第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を行う処理部とを備える。 The second radio access network device includes a receiving unit that receives information about transmission, and a processing unit that uses the information about transmission to perform processing related to communication with the first radio access network device.
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、伝送に関する情報を第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信(フィードバック)する。第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、伝送に関する情報を用いて、2つの装置(第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置及び第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置)の間の伝送を改善することができる。 The above configuration has the following effects. The first radio access network device sends (feeds back) information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device. The second radio access network device can use the information regarding the transmission to improve the transmission between the two devices (the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device).
 <<2.第1実施形態>>
 続いて、図1~図16を参照して、第1実施形態及びその変形例を説明する。
<<2. First Embodiment>>
Next, the first embodiment and its modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 16. FIG.
 <2-1.無線通信装置の概略構成>
 図1は、無線通信装置100の概略構成を示す図である。無線通信装置100は、3GPP(Third Generation Partnership Project)の技術仕様に準拠した装置である。具体的には、無線通信装置100は、5G(5th Generation)の技術仕様に準拠した装置であってもよい。当然ながら、無線通信装置100は、この例に限定されない。
<2-1. Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device>
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a wireless communication device 100. As shown in FIG. Wireless communication device 100 is a device conforming to the technical specifications of 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project). Specifically, the wireless communication device 100 may be a device conforming to the technical specifications of 5G (5th Generation). Of course, wireless communication device 100 is not limited to this example.
 無線通信装置100は、デルタシグマ変調装置110と、伝送経路120とを備える。無線通信装置100は、デルタシグマ変調装置110によって出力された信号を、伝送経路120を介して無線信号に変換し、当該無線信号を端末装置190へ送信する。 A wireless communication device 100 includes a delta-sigma modulation device 110 and a transmission path 120 . Radio communication apparatus 100 converts the signal output by delta-sigma modulation apparatus 110 into a radio signal via transmission path 120 and transmits the radio signal to terminal apparatus 190 .
 デルタシグマ変調装置110は、デルタシグマ変調部111と、ニューラルネットワーク処理部112と、ニューラルネットワーク学習部113とを備える。以降において、ニューラルネットワーク処理部112は、「NN処理部112」と称呼される。ニューラルネットワーク学習部113は、「NN学習部113」と称呼される。 The delta-sigma modulation device 110 includes a delta-sigma modulation section 111, a neural network processing section 112, and a neural network learning section 113. Hereinafter, the neural network processing unit 112 is referred to as "NN processing unit 112". The neural network learning unit 113 is called "NN learning unit 113".
 伝送経路120は、通信経路130と、送信部140とを備える。通信経路130は、デルタシグマ変調部111と送信部140とを接続する。送信部140は、アンテナ141と、バンドパスフィルタ(BPF)142と、増幅器143と、変調部144とを備える。 The transmission path 120 includes a communication path 130 and a transmission section 140 . Communication path 130 connects delta-sigma modulation section 111 and transmission section 140 . The transmitter 140 includes an antenna 141 , a bandpass filter (BPF) 142 , an amplifier 143 and a modulator 144 .
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、外部入力信号としてのアナログ信号に対してデルタシグマ変調を実行して、量子化信号(1ビットパルス列)を出力する。量子化信号は、通信経路130を介してBPF142に送信される。BPF142は、量子化信号に対して、所望の周波数帯域のみを通過させるバンドパス処理(以下、「BPF処理」と称呼する)を実行する。量子化信号は、BPF142を通してアナログ信号へと変換される。即ち、量子化信号は、デルタシグマ変調前の元のアナログ信号へと復元される。増幅器143は、アナログ信号を増幅する。アンテナ141は、当該増幅されたアナログ信号を出力する。このように送信部140は、信号を端末装置190へ向けて送信する機能を有する。 The delta-sigma modulation unit 111 performs delta-sigma modulation on an analog signal as an external input signal and outputs a quantized signal (1-bit pulse train). The quantized signal is sent to BPF 142 via communication path 130 . The BPF 142 performs bandpass processing (hereinafter referred to as “BPF processing”) for passing only a desired frequency band on the quantized signal. The quantized signal is converted to an analog signal through BPF 142 . That is, the quantized signal is restored to the original analog signal before delta-sigma modulation. Amplifier 143 amplifies the analog signal. Antenna 141 outputs the amplified analog signal. Thus, the transmission section 140 has a function of transmitting a signal toward the terminal device 190 .
 なお、上記増幅されたアナログ信号は、変調部144にも出力される。変調部144は、アナログ信号に対して変調処理を実行し、当該変調されたアナログ信号をNN学習部113に出力する。このように、送信部140は、デルタシグマ変調部111によって出力された量子化信号の伝送過程を経て生成された信号をデルタシグマ変調装置110へと送信する(即ち、フィードバックする)機能も有する。 Note that the amplified analog signal is also output to the modulation section 144 . Modulation section 144 performs modulation processing on the analog signal and outputs the modulated analog signal to NN learning section 113 . Thus, the transmitter 140 also has a function of transmitting (that is, feeding back) the signal generated through the transmission process of the quantized signal output from the delta-sigma modulator 111 to the delta-sigma modulator 110 .
 以降において、デルタシグマ変調部111に入力されるアナログ信号は、「第1の信号」と称呼される。更に、デルタシグマ変調部111によって出力される量子化信号は、「第2の信号」と称呼される。更に、第2の信号の伝送過程を経て生成された信号であって、NN学習部113へフィードバックされる信号は、「第3の信号」と称呼される。他の言い方をすれば、第3の信号は、第2の信号が伝送経路120上を伝送される過程において生成された信号である。第3の信号は、伝送経路120において生じた伝送歪みについての情報を含み得る。従って、第3の信号は、伝送経路120において生じた伝送歪みについての情報をフィードバックするために使用される。 Hereinafter, the analog signal input to the delta-sigma modulation section 111 will be referred to as a "first signal". Furthermore, the quantized signal output by the delta-sigma modulating section 111 is referred to as a "second signal". Further, a signal generated through the transmission process of the second signal and fed back to the NN learning unit 113 is referred to as a "third signal". In other words, the third signal is a signal generated in the course of the second signal being transmitted over transmission path 120 . The third signal may contain information about transmission distortions induced in transmission path 120 . Accordingly, the third signal is used to feed back information about transmission distortions that have occurred in transmission path 120 .
 NN処理部112は、所定のパラメータに従って動作する第1のニューラルネットワーク300を含む(図3を参照)。以降において、第1のニューラルネットワーク300は、「第1のNN300」と称呼される。第1のNN300のパラメータは、「第1のパラメータ」と称呼される。 The NN processing unit 112 includes a first neural network 300 that operates according to predetermined parameters (see FIG. 3). Hereinafter, the first neural network 300 will be referred to as "first NN 300". The parameters of the first NN 300 are referred to as "first parameters".
 NN学習部113は、第2の信号と第3の信号とを入力信号として受け取る。NN学習部113は、第2の信号と、第3の信号とを用いて、第1のパラメータを計算する。NN学習部113は、当該計算された第1のパラメータをNN処理部112へ送信する。 The NN learning unit 113 receives the second signal and the third signal as input signals. NN learning section 113 calculates the first parameter using the second signal and the third signal. NN learning section 113 transmits the calculated first parameter to NN processing section 112 .
 NN処理部112は、NN学習部113から第1のパラメータを受け取る。NN処理部112は、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを、上記受け取った第1のパラメータ(即ち、NN学習部113によって計算された第1のパラメータ)に更新する。 The NN processing unit 112 receives the first parameter from the NN learning unit 113 . The NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter (that is, the first parameter calculated by the NN learning unit 113).
 NN処理部112は、第2の信号を入力信号として受け取る。NN処理部112は、第2の信号を用いて、第1のNN300を通して、第2の信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部を経て生成される信号の近似値(アナログ信号)を出力する。以降において、この近似値は、「第4の信号」と称呼される。NN処理部112は、第4の信号を用いて、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みについての情報をデルタシグマ変調部111へフィードバックすることができる。 The NN processing unit 112 receives the second signal as an input signal. The NN processing unit 112 uses the second signal to output an approximate value (analog signal) of the signal generated through at least part of the transmission process of the second signal through the first NN 300 . Hereinafter, this approximation will be referred to as the "fourth signal". NN processing section 112 can use the fourth signal to feed back, to delta-sigma modulation section 111, information about the transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal.
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、第1の信号と第4の信号とを入力信号として受け取る。デルタシグマ変調部111は、第4の信号を用いて、第1の信号に対してデルタシグマ変調を実行して、第2の信号を出力する。 The delta-sigma modulation section 111 receives the first signal and the fourth signal as input signals. Delta-sigma modulation section 111 performs delta-sigma modulation on the first signal using the fourth signal, and outputs the second signal.
 一般的には、図38において説明した1入力1出力の構成(即ち、量子化信号がその内部で直接フィードバックされるデルタシグマ変調部3721)が、デルタシグマ変調と称呼される。これに対し、本開示の1以上の実施形態では、第2の信号が第4の信号として直接フィードバックされず、第2の信号と第4の信号とは、NN処理部112をそれらの間に介在させることにより分離される。デルタシグマ変調部111は、第1の信号と第4の信号の2つを入力信号として受け取って第2の信号を出力する構成、即ち、2入力1出力の構成である。本開示の1以上の実施形態では、便宜上、このような2入力1出力の構成が、デルタシグマ変調と定義される。NN処理部112は、フィードバック機能を担う。1以上の実施形態は、NN処理部112内の第1のパラメータがNN学習部113によって更新される点に特徴がある。 Generally, the 1-input 1-output configuration described in FIG. 38 (that is, the delta-sigma modulation section 3721 in which the quantized signal is directly fed back) is called delta-sigma modulation. In contrast, in one or more embodiments of the present disclosure, the second signal is not directly fed back as the fourth signal, and the second and fourth signals have NN processing unit 112 between them. separated by an interposition. The delta-sigma modulation unit 111 receives the first signal and the fourth signal as input signals and outputs the second signal, that is, has a two-input one-output configuration. In one or more embodiments of the present disclosure, for convenience, such a two-input, one-output configuration is defined as delta-sigma modulation. The NN processing unit 112 has a feedback function. One or more embodiments are characterized in that the first parameter in the NN processing unit 112 is updated by the NN learning unit 113 .
 <2-2.デルタシグマ変調部の構成>
 デルタシグマ変調部111を実装するデバイスのタイプとして、バンドパスタイプ(非特許文献1を参照)及びローパスタイプ(非特許文献2を参照)の2種類が存在する。本例のデルタシグマ変調部111は、バンドパスタイプのデバイスであり、非特許文献1を参考に実装されている。
<2-2. Configuration of delta-sigma modulation section>
There are two types of devices that implement the delta-sigma modulation unit 111: a bandpass type (see Non-Patent Document 1) and a low-pass type (see Non-Patent Document 2). The delta-sigma modulation unit 111 of this example is a band-pass type device, and is implemented with reference to Non-Patent Document 1.
 図2は、デルタシグマ変調部111の構成の一例を示す図である。デルタシグマ変調部111は、アップコンバータ210と、ループフィルタ220と、量子化器230とを備える。 FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the delta-sigma modulation section 111. As shown in FIG. Delta-sigma modulation section 111 includes upconverter 210 , loop filter 220 , and quantizer 230 .
 第1の信号は、ベースバンド信号であり、同相成分信号(以下、「I信号」と称呼する)と、直交成分信号(以下、「Q信号」と称呼する)とを含む。 The first signal is a baseband signal and includes an in-phase component signal (hereinafter referred to as "I signal") and a quadrature component signal (hereinafter referred to as "Q signal").
 アップコンバータ210は、2入力1出力の構成要素である。アップコンバータ210は、I信号とQ信号とを、入力信号として受け取る。アップコンバータ210は、第1の信号(I信号及びQ信号)を所望の周波数(ターゲットの周波数)f0にアップコンバートする。 The upconverter 210 is a 2-input, 1-output component. Upconverter 210 receives the I and Q signals as input signals. Upconverter 210 upconverts the first signal (I signal and Q signal) to a desired frequency (target frequency) f0.
 アップコンバータ210は、第1の乗算器211aと、第2の乗算器211bと、加算器212とを備える。第1の乗算器211aは、I信号に対してcosωtを乗算して、乗算結果を加算器212に出力する。第2の乗算器211bは、Q信号に対して-sinωtを乗算して、乗算結果を加算器212に出力する。ここで、「cos()」は、余弦関数であり、「sin()」は、正弦関数である(以下、同じ)。更に、ω=2×π×f0である。 The upconverter 210 includes a first multiplier 211a, a second multiplier 211b, and an adder 212. The first multiplier 211 a multiplies the I signal by cos ωt and outputs the multiplication result to the adder 212 . The second multiplier 211 b multiplies the Q signal by −sinωt and outputs the multiplication result to the adder 212 . Here, "cos()" is a cosine function and "sin()" is a sine function (same below). Furthermore, ω=2×π×f0.
 加算器212は、第1の乗算器211aの乗算結果と第2の乗算器211bの乗算結果とを加算して、加算結果を出力する。 The adder 212 adds the multiplication result of the first multiplier 211a and the multiplication result of the second multiplier 211b, and outputs the addition result.
 ループフィルタ220は、2入力1出力の要素である。ループフィルタ220は、アップコンバータ210の出力と第4の信号とを、入力信号として受け取る。ループフィルタ220は、入力信号のうちのフィードバック成分(即ち、第4の信号)に含まれる伝送歪みを抑制するための処理を実行する。 The loop filter 220 is a 2-input, 1-output element. Loop filter 220 receives as input signals the output of upconverter 210 and the fourth signal. The loop filter 220 performs processing for suppressing transmission distortion contained in the feedback component (that is, the fourth signal) of the input signal.
 ループフィルタ220は、第1の加算器221aと、第2の加算器221bと、伝達関数処理部222とを備える。 The loop filter 220 includes a first adder 221a, a second adder 221b, and a transfer function processing section 222.
 第1の加算器221aは、アップコンバータ210の出力(加算器212の出力)と第4の信号とを加算し、加算結果を伝達関数処理部222に出力する。ここで、第1の加算器221aの出力は、アップコンバータ210の出力と第4の信号との差分である。他の言い方をすれば、第1の加算器221aの出力は、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みの成分を含み得る。 The first adder 221 a adds the output of the upconverter 210 (the output of the adder 212 ) and the fourth signal, and outputs the addition result to the transfer function processing section 222 . Here, the output of the first adder 221a is the difference between the output of the upconverter 210 and the fourth signal. In other words, the output of the first adder 221a may contain transmission distortion components that occur during the transmission process of the second signal.
 伝達関数処理部222は、第1の加算器221aの出力に対して伝達関数を適用して、第2の信号の伝送過程(伝送経路120)において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を抑制する(又はキャンセルする)ための成分を出力する。伝達関数は、本例におけるデルタシグマ変調の特性を決定する関数であり、所望の信号伝達関数及び雑音伝達関数等に基づいて決定される。 The transfer function processing unit 222 applies a transfer function to the output of the first adder 221a to suppress (or to cancel). The transfer function is a function that determines the characteristics of the delta-sigma modulation in this example, and is determined based on the desired signal transfer function, noise transfer function, and the like.
 第2の加算器221bは、アップコンバータ210の出力と、伝達関数処理部222の出力とを加算し、加算結果を量子化器230に出力する。 The second adder 221 b adds the output of the upconverter 210 and the output of the transfer function processing section 222 and outputs the addition result to the quantizer 230 .
 このように、ループフィルタ220は、アップコンバータ210の出力と第4の信号とを用いて、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を抑制するための成分を含む信号(アナログ信号)を出力する。 In this way, loop filter 220 uses the output of upconverter 210 and the fourth signal to generate a signal (analog signal).
 量子化器230は、1ビット量子化器である。量子化器230は、ループフィルタ220の出力(第2の加算器221bの出力)を1ビットで量子化して、第2の信号(1ビットパルス列)を出力する。 Quantizer 230 is a 1-bit quantizer. The quantizer 230 quantizes the output of the loop filter 220 (output of the second adder 221b) with 1 bit and outputs a second signal (1-bit pulse train).
 このように、デルタシグマ変調部111は、第4の信号を用いて、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を抑制するための成分を計算し、当該成分を第2の信号に反映させる。 In this way, delta-sigma modulation section 111 uses the fourth signal to calculate a component for suppressing at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal, and converts the calculated component into the second signal. reflected in the signal.
 他の例において、ループフィルタ220において、第2の加算器221bが省略されてもよい。この場合、伝達関数処理部222の出力が、量子化器230に入力される。伝達関数処理部222の出力は、アップコンバータ210の出力と、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を抑制するための成分とを含む。 In another example, the loop filter 220 may omit the second adder 221b. In this case, the output of transfer function processing section 222 is input to quantizer 230 . The output of transfer function processing section 222 includes the output of upconverter 210 and a component for suppressing at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal.
 <2-3.ニューラルネットワーク処理部の構成>
 図3は、NN処理部112の構成の一例を示す図である。NN処理部112は、第1のNN300を含む。第1のNN300は、第2の信号を入力信号として受け取り、第4の信号を出力する。
<2-3. Configuration of Neural Network Processing Unit>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the NN processing unit 112. As shown in FIG. NN processing unit 112 includes a first NN 300 . The first NN 300 receives the second signal as an input signal and outputs a fourth signal.
 本例において、第4の信号は、第2の信号が伝送経路120の一部を通過する過程において生成される信号の近似値(推定値)である。より具体的には、第4の信号は、第2の信号が、通信経路130、BPF142及び増幅器143を通過する過程において生成される信号の近似値(推定値)である。他の言い方をすれば、第4の信号は、アンテナ141から出力される無線信号の近似値(推定値)である。 In this example, the fourth signal is an approximation (estimate) of the signal generated while the second signal passes through part of the transmission path 120 . More specifically, the fourth signal is an approximation (estimate) of the signal generated in the course of the second signal passing through communication path 130 , BPF 142 and amplifier 143 . In other words, the fourth signal is an approximation (estimate) of the radio signal output from antenna 141 .
 従って、第4の信号は、第2の信号の伝送過程を経て生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部の近似値を含む。具体的には、第4の信号は、第2の信号が、通信経路130、BPF142及び増幅器143を通過する過程において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部の近似値を含む。 Therefore, the fourth signal contains an approximation of at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs through the transmission process of the second signal. Specifically, the fourth signal includes an approximation of at least a portion of the transmission distortion that the second signal experiences as it passes through communication path 130 , BPF 142 and amplifier 143 .
 第1のNN300は、第1のパラメータに従って動作する。第1のパラメータは、例えば、重み及びバイアスを含む。例えば、以下の式(1)の関数fが、ニューラルネットワークにおける活性化関数であるとすると、xが入力であり、wが重みであり、bがバイアスである。
 f(wx+b)    ・・・(1)
The first NN 300 operates according to the first parameters. The first parameters include, for example, weights and biases. For example, let the function f in equation (1) below be the activation function in the neural network, where x is the input, w is the weight, and b is the bias.
f(wx+b) (1)
 第1のNN300は、入力層310と、中間層320と、出力層330とを備える。中間層320は1層である。 The first NN 300 comprises an input layer 310 , an intermediate layer 320 and an output layer 330 . The intermediate layer 320 is one layer.
 入力層310は、第2の信号の現在の値が入力されるノード310aを含む。更に、入力層310は、第2の信号の過去の値が入力されるノード310bを更に含む。なお、「D」は、遅延を表す。出力層330は、活性化関数を持たない線形層である。第1のパラメータは、中間層320に反映される。出力層330は、中間層320の複数のノードの出力の総和を第4の信号として出力する。 The input layer 310 includes a node 310a into which the current value of the second signal is input. Additionally, the input layer 310 further includes a node 310b into which the past value of the second signal is input. Note that "D" represents delay. The output layer 330 is a linear layer with no activation functions. A first parameter is reflected in the intermediate layer 320 . The output layer 330 outputs the sum of the outputs of the multiple nodes of the intermediate layer 320 as a fourth signal.
 第1のNN300の構成は、図3の構成に限定されない。一般的に使われている各種のニューラルネットワークが本実施形態に適用されてもよい。例えば、第1のNN300の中間層320は、複数層を有してもよい。即ち、第1のNN300として、多層のニューラルネットワークが採用されてもよい。 The configuration of the first NN 300 is not limited to the configuration of FIG. Various commonly used neural networks may be applied to this embodiment. For example, the intermediate layer 320 of the first NN 300 may have multiple layers. That is, a multilayer neural network may be adopted as the first NN 300 .
 NN処理部112は、NN学習部113から第1のパラメータを受け取る。NN処理部112は、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを、上記受け取った第1のパラメータに更新する。即ち、NN処理部112は、第1のパラメータを、伝送経路120の状態に応じて更新する。従って、NN処理部112は、伝送経路120の現在の状態において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を第4の信号に反映させることができる。 The NN processing unit 112 receives the first parameter from the NN learning unit 113 . The NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter. That is, the NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter according to the state of the transmission path 120 . Therefore, the NN processing unit 112 can reflect at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the current state of the transmission path 120 in the fourth signal.
 <2-4.ニューラルネットワーク学習部の構成の概要>
 図4は、NN学習部113の構成の一例を示す図である。NN学習部113は、伝送モデル410と、誤差計算部420と、パラメータ計算部430とを備える。
<2-4. Outline of Configuration of Neural Network Learning Unit>
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the NN learning unit 113. As shown in FIG. NN learning section 113 includes transmission model 410 , error calculation section 420 , and parameter calculation section 430 .
 伝送モデル410は、第2の信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部をモデル化した構成要素である。本例において、伝送モデル410は、伝送経路120をモデル化した構成要素である。伝送モデル410は、第2の信号を用いて、第3の信号の近似値(推定値)を出力する。 The transmission model 410 is a component that models at least part of the transmission process of the second signal. In this example, transmission model 410 is a component that models transmission path 120 . Transmission model 410 uses the second signal to output an approximation (estimate) of the third signal.
 伝送モデル410は、所定のパラメータに従って動作する第2のニューラルネットワーク600を含む(図6を参照)。以降において、第2のニューラルネットワーク600は、「第2のNN600」と称呼される。第2のNN600のパラメータは、「第2のパラメータ」と称呼される。第2のパラメータは、第1のパラメータと同様に、重み及びバイアスを含む。 The transmission model 410 includes a second neural network 600 operating according to predetermined parameters (see FIG. 6). The second neural network 600 is hereinafter referred to as the "second NN 600". The parameters of the second NN 600 are referred to as "second parameters". The second parameter, like the first parameter, includes weights and biases.
 誤差計算部420は、伝送モデル410の出力(第3の信号の近似値)と第3の信号(本例では、変調部144の出力)とを、入力信号として受け取る。誤差計算部420は、伝送モデル410の出力と、第3の信号との間の誤差(差分)を計算する。以降において、当該誤差は、「近似誤差」と称呼される。誤差計算部420は、近似誤差をパラメータ計算部430に出力する。 The error calculator 420 receives the output of the transmission model 410 (approximate value of the third signal) and the third signal (output of the modulator 144 in this example) as input signals. Error calculator 420 calculates the error (difference) between the output of transmission model 410 and the third signal. Hereinafter, this error will be referred to as the "approximation error". Error calculator 420 outputs the approximation error to parameter calculator 430 .
 パラメータ計算部430は、近似誤差を用いて、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する。パラメータ計算部430は、当該計算された第1のパラメータを、NN処理部112へ送信する。更に、パラメータ計算部430は、第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを、当該計算された第2のパラメータに更新する。 The parameter calculator 430 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter using the approximation error. Parameter calculator 430 transmits the calculated first parameter to NN processor 112 . Furthermore, the parameter calculator 430 updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 to the calculated second parameter.
 このように、NN学習部113は、第2の信号と第3の信号とを用いて、伝送経路120の現在の状態を学習する。即ち、NN学習部113は、伝送経路120の現在の状態に応じて第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する。NN学習部113は、伝送経路120の現在の状態において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を第1のNN300及び第2のNN600に反映させることができる。 Thus, the NN learning unit 113 learns the current state of the transmission path 120 using the second signal and the third signal. That is, the NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter according to the current state of the transmission path 120. FIG. NN learning section 113 can reflect at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the current state of transmission path 120 in first NN 300 and second NN 600 .
 <2-5.通信経路の構成>
 通信経路130は、電気信号を伝送する電気伝送線(例えば、金属線)と、光信号を伝送する光伝送線(例えば、光ファイバ)との一方又は両方を含む。
<2-5. Configuration of Communication Path>
The communication path 130 includes one or both of an electrical transmission line (eg, metal wire) that transmits electrical signals and an optical transmission line (eg, optical fiber) that transmits optical signals.
 なお、通信経路130は、電気信号を光信号に変換するE/O変換部、光信号を電気信号に変換するO/E変換部、バンドパスフィルタ、及び、周波数変換部等の1つ又はこれらの組み合わせを含んでもよい。 Note that the communication path 130 includes one or more of an E/O converter that converts an electrical signal into an optical signal, an O/E converter that converts an optical signal into an electrical signal, a bandpass filter, a frequency converter, and the like. may include a combination of
 <2-6.バンドパスフィルタの構成>
 BPF142は、通信経路130の出力に対してBPF処理を実行する。ここで、所望の周波数帯域は、f0-fαからf0+fαまでの帯域である。fαは、任意の周波数である。
<2-6. Configuration of Bandpass Filter>
BPF 142 performs BPF processing on the output of communication path 130 . Here, the desired frequency band is a band from f0-fα to f0+fα. fα is an arbitrary frequency.
 BPF142は、アナログ素子によって構成されてもよい。BPF142は、LCフィルタ又はRLCフィルタであってもよい。LCフィルタは、インダクタ(L)及びキャパシタ(C)の組合せに基づいて構成されるフィルタである。RLCフィルタは、抵抗器(R)、インダクタ(L)及びキャパシタ(C)の組合せに基づいて構成されるフィルタである。 The BPF 142 may be composed of analog elements. BPF 142 may be an LC filter or an RLC filter. An LC filter is a filter based on a combination of inductors (L) and capacitors (C). An RLC filter is a filter based on a combination of resistors (R), inductors (L) and capacitors (C).
 <2-7.変調部の構成>
 図5は、変調部144の構成の一例を示す図である。変調部144は、増幅器143の出力をダイレクトコンバージョン方式によってダウンコンバートして、ダウンコンバートされた信号を第3の信号として出力する。
<2-7. Configuration of Modulation Unit>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the modulating section 144. As shown in FIG. Modulation section 144 down-converts the output of amplifier 143 by a direct conversion method and outputs the down-converted signal as a third signal.
 変調部144は、第1の変調部500aと、第2の変調部500bとを備える。 The modulating section 144 includes a first modulating section 500a and a second modulating section 500b.
 第1の変調部500aは、第1の乗算器510aと、第1のローパスフィルタ(LPF)520aと、第1のA/Dコンバータ(ADC)530aとを備える。 The first modulating section 500a includes a first multiplier 510a, a first low-pass filter (LPF) 520a, and a first A/D converter (ADC) 530a.
 第1の乗算器510aは、増幅器143の出力に対してcosωtを乗算して、乗算結果を第1のLPF520aに出力する。ここで、ω=2×π×f0である。第1のLPF520aは、第1の乗算器510aの出力に対してローパスフィルタ処理を実行して、実行結果を第1のADC530aに出力する。第1のADC530aは、第1のLPF520aの出力をデジタル信号に変換し、これにより、デジタルのI信号を出力する。 The first multiplier 510a multiplies the output of the amplifier 143 by cosωt and outputs the multiplication result to the first LPF 520a. where ω=2×π×f0. The first LPF 520a performs low-pass filtering on the output of the first multiplier 510a and outputs the execution result to the first ADC 530a. The first ADC 530a converts the output of the first LPF 520a into a digital signal, thereby outputting a digital I signal.
 第2の変調部500bは、第2の乗算器510bと、第2のローパスフィルタ(LPF)520bと、第2のA/Dコンバータ(ADC)530bとを備える。 The second modulation section 500b includes a second multiplier 510b, a second low-pass filter (LPF) 520b, and a second A/D converter (ADC) 530b.
 第2の乗算器510bは、増幅器143の出力に対して-sinωtを乗算して、乗算結果を第2のLPF520bに出力する。第2のLPF520bは、第2の乗算器510bの出力に対してローパスフィルタ処理を実行して、実行結果を第2のADC530bに出力する。第2のADC530bは、第2のLPF520bの出力をデジタル信号に変換し、これにより、デジタルのQ信号を出力する。 The second multiplier 510b multiplies the output of the amplifier 143 by -sinωt and outputs the multiplication result to the second LPF 520b. The second LPF 520b performs low-pass filtering on the output of the second multiplier 510b and outputs the execution result to the second ADC 530b. The second ADC 530b converts the output of the second LPF 520b into a digital signal, thereby outputting a digital Q signal.
 従って、第3の信号は、デジタルのI信号と、デジタルのQ信号とを含む。第3の信号は、NN学習部113に入力される。 Therefore, the third signal includes a digital I signal and a digital Q signal. The third signal is input to NN learning section 113 .
 <2-8.ニューラルネットワーク学習部の具体的構成>
 次に、NN学習部113の具体的構成について説明する。まず、伝送モデル410の構成について説明する。図6は、伝送モデル410の構築の流れの一例である。
<2-8. Specific Configuration of Neural Network Learning Unit>
Next, a specific configuration of NN learning section 113 will be described. First, the configuration of the transmission model 410 will be described. FIG. 6 is an example of the flow of constructing the transmission model 410 .
 図6の上段に示すように、伝送経路120は、通信経路130と、BPF142と、増幅器143と、変調部144とを含む。ここで、増幅器143が強い非線形性を有しておらず、即ち、増幅器143が強い線形性を有していると仮定する。BPF142も線形性を有しているので、図6の中段に示すように、BPF142の位置と増幅器143の位置とを入れ替えることができる。即ち、上段の伝送経路120の構成は、中段の伝送経路120’によって近似することができる。これにより、通信経路130及び増幅器143をまとめてモデル化することができる。 As shown in the upper part of FIG. 6, the transmission path 120 includes a communication path 130, a BPF 142, an amplifier 143, and a modulation section 144. Now assume that amplifier 143 does not have strong nonlinearity, ie amplifier 143 has strong linearity. Since the BPF 142 also has linearity, the position of the BPF 142 and the position of the amplifier 143 can be interchanged as shown in the middle part of FIG. That is, the configuration of the upper transmission path 120 can be approximated by the middle transmission path 120'. This allows the communication path 130 and the amplifier 143 to be modeled together.
 通信経路130及び増幅器143は、まとめて、第2のNN600によってモデル化される。第2のNN600は、第2の信号の伝送過程の一部を経て生成される信号の近似値(推定値)を出力する。具体的には、第2のNN600は、第2の信号が通信経路130及び増幅器143を通過する過程において生成される信号の近似値を出力する。 The communication path 130 and amplifier 143 are collectively modeled by the second NN 600. The second NN 600 outputs an approximation (estimate) of the signal generated through part of the transmission process of the second signal. Specifically, second NN 600 outputs an approximation of the signal generated in the course of the second signal passing through communication path 130 and amplifier 143 .
 BPF142は、デジタルフィルタ610によってモデル化される。デジタルフィルタ610は、例えば、FIR(Finite impulse response)であってもよい。 The BPF 142 is modeled by a digital filter 610. Digital filter 610 may be, for example, FIR (Finite impulse response).
 変調部144は、デジタルダウンコンバータ620によってモデル化される。デジタルダウンコンバータ620は、変調部144と同じ機能/性質を有する。従って、デジタルダウンコンバータ620は、デジタルフィルタ610の出力をダウンコンバートして、デジタルのI信号及びデジタルのQ信号を出力する。 The modulation section 144 is modeled by a digital downconverter 620 . Digital downconverter 620 has the same functions/properties as modulator 144 . Accordingly, the digital downconverter 620 downconverts the output of the digital filter 610 to output a digital I signal and a digital Q signal.
 次に、誤差計算部420によって計算される近似誤差について説明する。近似誤差は、第3の信号の近似値(伝送モデル410の出力)と、実際の第3の信号(変調部144の出力)との間の誤差を表す。 Next, the approximation error calculated by the error calculator 420 will be described. The approximation error represents the error between the approximation of the third signal (output of transmission model 410) and the actual third signal (output of modulator 144).
 無線通信装置100が起動された時点にて、伝送経路120において生じる伝送歪みの情報が第2のNN600に反映されていないので、伝送モデル410は、第2の信号をそのまま出力する。一方で、実際の第3の信号は、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じた伝送歪みを含む。伝送歪みの大きさ(以下、「歪み量」と称呼する)が大きくなると、近似誤差が大きくなる。近似誤差が大きい場合、これは、伝送経路120において現在生じている伝送歪みについての情報が第1のNN300及び第2のNN600に反映できておらず、従って、伝送歪みが抑制できていないことを意味する。一方で、伝送経路120において生じる伝送歪みの情報が第2のNN600に反映された後であっても、歪み量は、時間の経過に従って変化する。従って、近似誤差が大きい場合、これは、伝送モデル410の出力に含まれる歪み量と、実際の第3の信号に含まれる歪み量との間の差(誤差)が大きいことも意味する。従って、近似誤差は、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じた歪み量に関連した値である。 At the time when the wireless communication device 100 is activated, the transmission distortion information generated in the transmission path 120 is not reflected in the second NN 600, so the transmission model 410 outputs the second signal as it is. On the other hand, the actual third signal includes transmission distortion caused during the transmission process of the second signal. As the magnitude of transmission distortion (hereinafter referred to as "distortion amount") increases, the approximation error increases. If the approximation error is large, this means that the information about the transmission distortion currently occurring in the transmission path 120 cannot be reflected in the first NN 300 and the second NN 600, and therefore the transmission distortion cannot be suppressed. means. On the other hand, even after information about transmission distortion occurring in transmission path 120 is reflected in second NN 600, the amount of distortion changes over time. Therefore, when the approximation error is large, it also means that the difference (error) between the amount of distortion included in the output of the transmission model 410 and the amount of distortion included in the actual third signal is large. Therefore, the approximation error is a value related to the amount of distortion that occurred during the transmission process of the second signal.
 近似誤差が小さい場合、これは、伝送モデル410の出力が実際の第3の信号に近いことを意味する。即ち、これは、伝送経路120において現在生じている伝送歪みについての情報が第1のNN300及び第2のNN600に反映できており、従って、伝送歪みが抑制できていることを意味する。 If the approximation error is small, this means that the output of transmission model 410 is close to the actual third signal. That is, this means that the information about the transmission distortion currently occurring in the transmission path 120 can be reflected in the first NN 300 and the second NN 600, and therefore the transmission distortion can be suppressed.
 誤差計算部420は、伝送モデル410によって出力されたI信号と、第3の信号に含まれるI信号との間の差分である第1の差分を計算する。I信号は実数成分であるので、第1の差分は実数成分である。更に、誤差計算部420は、伝送モデル410によって出力されたQ信号と、第3の信号に含まれるQ信号との間の差分である第2の差分を計算する。Q信号は虚数成分であるので、第2の差分は虚数成分である。 The error calculator 420 calculates a first difference between the I signal output by the transmission model 410 and the I signal included in the third signal. Since the I signal has a real component, the first difference has a real component. Furthermore, error calculator 420 calculates a second difference between the Q signal output by transmission model 410 and the Q signal included in the third signal. Since the Q signal is the imaginary component, the second difference is the imaginary component.
 誤差計算部420は、第1の差分と第2の差分とに基づいて近似誤差を計算する。例えば、近似誤差は、実数成分である第1の差分と、虚数成分である第2の差分とによって表現される複素数であってもよい。他の例によれば、近似誤差は、第1の差分の絶対値と第2の差分の絶対値とのうちの大きい方であってもよい。近似誤差は、伝送モデル410の出力と実際の第3の信号との間の誤差を表す限り、公知の計算方法の一つによって計算されてもよい。 The error calculator 420 calculates an approximation error based on the first difference and the second difference. For example, the approximation error may be a complex number represented by a first difference that is a real component and a second difference that is an imaginary component. According to another example, the approximation error may be the larger of the absolute value of the first difference and the absolute value of the second difference. The approximation error may be calculated by one of the known calculation methods so long as it represents the error between the output of transmission model 410 and the actual third signal.
 パラメータ計算部430は、近似誤差と伝送モデル410の内部パラメータとを用いて、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する。伝送モデル410の内部パラメータは、第2のNN600の第2のパラメータ、及び、第2のNN600内の少なくとも1つのノードの出力値を含んでもよい。他の例において、伝送モデル410の内部パラメータは、デジタルフィルタ610のフィルタ係数と、デジタルダウンコンバータ620におけるsin波及びcos波とを更に含んでもよい。パラメータ計算部430は、近似誤差が小さくなるように、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する。例えば、パラメータ計算部430は、第1の差分の絶対値及び第2の差分の絶対値の少なくとも一方が小さくなるように、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する。 The parameter calculator 430 uses the approximation error and the internal parameters of the transmission model 410 to calculate the first parameter and the second parameter. The internal parameters of transmission model 410 may include second parameters of second NN 600 and output values of at least one node within second NN 600 . In another example, the internal parameters of transmission model 410 may further include filter coefficients of digital filter 610 and sine and cosine waves in digital downconverter 620 . The parameter calculator 430 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter so as to reduce the approximation error. For example, the parameter calculator 430 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter such that at least one of the absolute value of the first difference and the absolute value of the second difference is small.
 <2-9.デルタシグマ変調装置の処理の流れ>
 次に、図7を参照して、デルタシグマ変調装置110の処理の流れを説明する。図7は、デルタシグマ変調装置110の処理の流れの一例を示すフローチャートである。
<2-9. Flow of Processing of Delta-Sigma Modulator>
Next, referring to FIG. 7, the processing flow of the delta-sigma modulation device 110 will be described. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing flow of the delta-sigma modulation device 110. As shown in FIG.
 無線通信装置100が起動される(又は無線通信装置100がリセットされる)と、デルタシグマ変調部111は、外部入力信号としての第1の信号に対してデルタシグマ変調を実行して、第2の信号を出力する(701)。 When radio communication apparatus 100 is activated (or radio communication apparatus 100 is reset), delta-sigma modulation section 111 performs delta-sigma modulation on a first signal as an external input signal to generate a second signal. signal is output (701).
 NN学習部113は、第2の信号と第3の信号とを用いて、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する(702)。NN学習部113は、上記計算された第1のパラメータをNN処理部112へ送信する。 The NN learning unit 113 uses the second signal and the third signal to calculate the first parameter and the second parameter (702). NN learning section 113 transmits the calculated first parameter to NN processing section 112 .
 NN処理部112は、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを、NN学習部113によって計算された第1のパラメータに更新する。更に、NN学習部113は、伝送モデル410における第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを、上記計算された第2のパラメータに更新する(703)。 The NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the first parameter calculated by the NN learning unit 113. Furthermore, the NN learning unit 113 updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 in the transmission model 410 to the calculated second parameter (703).
 NN処理部112は、第2の信号を用いて、第1のNN300を通して、第4の信号を出力する(704)。 The NN processing unit 112 outputs a fourth signal through the first NN 300 using the second signal (704).
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、第4の信号を用いて、第1の信号に対してデルタシグマ変調を実行して、第2の信号を出力する(705)。 The delta-sigma modulation unit 111 performs delta-sigma modulation on the first signal using the fourth signal and outputs the second signal (705).
 その後、ステップ702~ステップ705の処理が繰り返し実行される。 After that, the processes of steps 702 to 705 are repeatedly executed.
 上記構成は以下の効果を奏する。デルタシグマ変調装置110は、第2の信号の伝送過程(伝送経路120)において生じた伝送歪みに関する情報を、フィードバックされる第3の信号として受け取る。デルタシグマ変調装置110は、第2の信号と第3の信号とを用いて近似誤差を計算し、当該近似誤差を用いて第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する。デルタシグマ変調装置110は、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを上記計算された第1のパラメータに更新するとともに、第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを上記計算された第2のパラメータに更新する。これにより、伝送経路120において生じる伝送歪みの情報が第1のNN300及び第2のNN600に反映される。デルタシグマ変調装置110は、第4の信号(第1のNN300の出力)を用いて、第1の信号に対してデルタシグマ変調を実行する。これにより、デルタシグマ変調装置110は、ターゲットの周波数f0の信号成分を通過させて、周波数f0の近傍の雑音を帯域外に移行させるノイズシェーピングを行うことができる。 The above configuration has the following effects. The delta-sigma modulator 110 receives, as a third signal to be fed back, information about transmission distortion that occurred in the transmission process (transmission path 120) of the second signal. Delta-sigma modulator 110 calculates an approximation error using the second signal and the third signal, and calculates the first parameter and the second parameter using the approximation error. The delta-sigma modulator 110 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the calculated first parameter, and updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 to the calculated second parameter. do. Thereby, information on transmission distortion occurring in the transmission path 120 is reflected in the first NN 300 and the second NN 600 . Delta-sigma modulator 110 performs delta-sigma modulation on the first signal using the fourth signal (output of first NN 300). As a result, the delta-sigma modulator 110 can pass the signal component of the target frequency f0 and perform noise shaping to move the noise in the vicinity of the frequency f0 out of the band.
 デルタシグマ変調装置110は、上述したようなフィードバック処理によって、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みを抑えることができる。従って、デルタシグマ変調装置110は、スペクトラムリークを抑えることができる。デルタシグマ変調装置110は、高品質な信号の伝送を行うことができる。 The delta-sigma modulation device 110 can suppress transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal by the feedback processing as described above. Therefore, the delta-sigma modulation device 110 can suppress spectrum leak. The delta-sigma modulator 110 is capable of high quality signal transmission.
 <2-10.無線通信装置の具体的構成例>
 次に、図8~図10を参照して、無線通信装置の具体的構成について説明する。図8は、無線通信装置800の具体的構成の一例である。既に説明された構成要素については、同一の符号を付することにより詳細な説明が省略される。
<2-10. Specific Configuration Example of Wireless Communication Device>
Next, a specific configuration of the wireless communication device will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. FIG. 8 is an example of a specific configuration of wireless communication device 800 . Constituent elements that have already been described are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
 無線通信装置800は、無線アクセスネットワーク(Radio Access Network:RAN)のノードである。本例において、無線通信装置800は、基地局である。無線通信装置800は、カバレッジエリア内に位置する端末装置190との無線通信を行う。 A wireless communication device 800 is a node of a radio access network (RAN). In this example, wireless communication device 800 is a base station. The wireless communication device 800 performs wireless communication with the terminal device 190 located within its coverage area.
 無線通信装置800は、複数の装置(又は複数のノード)を含む。具体的には、無線通信装置800は、第1の装置810と、第2の装置820とを備える。第1の装置810は、無線アクセスネットワークのノードであり、「第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置」と称呼される場合がある。第2の装置820は、無線アクセスネットワークのノードであり、「第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置」と称呼される場合がある。 A wireless communication device 800 includes multiple devices (or multiple nodes). Specifically, wireless communication device 800 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 . The first device 810 is a node of the radio access network and may be referred to as "first radio access network device". The second device 820 is a node of the radio access network and may be referred to as "second radio access network device".
 第1の装置810は、第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う。本例において、第1の物理レイヤに関する処理は、BPF処理及び増幅処理を含む。 The first device 810 performs processing related to the first physical layer. In this example, the processing for the first physical layer includes BPF processing and amplification processing.
 第2の装置820は、第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う。本例において、第2の物理レイヤに関する処理は、デルタシグマ変調を含む。なお、第1及び第2の物理レイヤは、第1の装置810と、第2の装置820とに実装された通信プロトコルをなす複数レイヤのうち、第1層(最下位層)に含まれると捉えてもよい。 The second device 820 performs processing related to the second physical layer, which is higher than the first physical layer. In this example, the processing for the second physical layer includes delta-sigma modulation. It should be noted that the first and second physical layers are included in the first layer (lowest layer) of the multiple layers forming the communication protocol implemented in the first device 810 and the second device 820. You can catch it.
 第1の装置810と第2の装置820とは、第1の通信経路131を介して接続されている。第2の装置820は、第2の信号を第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する。 The first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the first communication path 131 . Second device 820 transmits a second signal to first device 810 via first communication path 131 .
 第1の装置810と第2の装置820とは、第2の通信経路132を介して接続されている。第1の装置810は、第1の装置810と第2の装置820との間の伝送に関する情報を第2の通信経路132を介して第2の装置820へ送信する。以降において、上記伝送に関する情報は、「伝送関連情報」と称呼される。 The first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the second communication path 132 . First device 810 transmits information regarding transmissions between first device 810 and second device 820 to second device 820 via second communication path 132 . Hereinafter, the information related to transmission is referred to as "transmission-related information".
 本例において、伝送関連情報は、第2の装置820から第1の装置810へと送信される第2の信号の伝送に関する情報である。具体的には、伝送関連情報は、第2の信号の伝送過程において生成された第3の信号(即ち、変調部144の出力)である。第3の信号は、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じた伝送歪みに関する情報を含む。 In this example, the transmission-related information is information about transmission of the second signal transmitted from the second device 820 to the first device 810 . Specifically, the transmission-related information is the third signal (that is, the output of the modulating section 144) generated in the process of transmitting the second signal. The third signal contains information about transmission distortion caused during the transmission process of the second signal.
 <2-11.第1の装置の構成>
 第1の装置810は、アンテナ141と、BPF142と、増幅器143と、変調部144と、情報送信部145とを備える。情報送信部145は、第2の通信経路132を介した第2の装置820との通信を制御する。具体的には、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報の送信を制御する。
<2-11. Configuration of the first device>
A first device 810 includes an antenna 141 , a BPF 142 , an amplifier 143 , a modulator 144 and an information transmitter 145 . Information transmitter 145 controls communication with second device 820 via second communication path 132 . Specifically, the information transmission unit 145 controls transmission of transmission-related information.
 図9は、第1の装置810のハードウェア構成の一例を示す図である。第1の装置810は、通信インタフェース910と、記憶部920と、処理部930とを備える。 FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the first device 810. As shown in FIG. The first device 810 comprises a communication interface 910 , a storage section 920 and a processing section 930 .
 通信インタフェース910は、他の装置との通信のためのインタフェースである。通信インタフェース910は、無線通信のためのアンテナ141を含む。更に、通信インタフェース910は、第1の通信経路131を介して第2の装置820と通信するための接続端子及び接続回路等を含む。通信インタフェース910は、第2の通信経路132を介して第2の装置820と通信するための接続端子及び接続回路等を含む。 A communication interface 910 is an interface for communication with other devices. Communication interface 910 includes antenna 141 for wireless communication. Further, the communication interface 910 includes connection terminals, connection circuitry, etc. for communicating with the second device 820 via the first communication path 131 . The communication interface 910 includes connection terminals, connection circuitry, etc. for communicating with the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 .
 記憶部920は、揮発性メモリ及び不揮発性メモリを含む。揮発性メモリは、例えば、RAM(Random Access Memory)を含んでよい。不揮発性メモリは、例えば、ROM(Read Only Memory)、HDD(Hard Disk Drive)及びSSD(Solid State Drive)のうちの1つ以上を含んでよい。不揮発性メモリは、第1の装置810の1つ以上の機能を実現するためのプログラムコード(インストラクション)を記憶する。 The storage unit 920 includes volatile memory and nonvolatile memory. Volatile memory may include, for example, random access memory (RAM). The non-volatile memory may include, for example, one or more of ROM (Read Only Memory), HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and SSD (Solid State Drive). The non-volatile memory stores program code (instructions) for implementing one or more functions of the first device 810 .
 処理部930は、1つ以上のプロセッサを含む。当該1つ以上のプロセッサは、例えば、CPU(Central Processing Unit)、MPU(Micro Processing Unit)及びマイクロコントローラのうちの1つ以上を含んでよい。処理部930は、記憶部920に記憶されたプログラムコード(インストラクション)を実行することにより、第1の装置810の1つ以上の機能を実現する。 The processing unit 930 includes one or more processors. The one or more processors may include, for example, one or more of a CPU (Central Processing Unit), an MPU (Micro Processing Unit), and a microcontroller. The processing unit 930 implements one or more functions of the first device 810 by executing program codes (instructions) stored in the storage unit 920 .
 処理部930は、1つ以上のアナログ素子及び/又はアナログ回路を含んでもよい。処理部930は、1つ以上のアナログ素子及び/又はアナログ回路を用いて、第1の装置810の1つ以上の機能を実現してもよい。なお、本明細書において、「A及び/又はB」という表現は、「A又はB」、又は、「A及びB」と解釈されるべきである。 The processing unit 930 may include one or more analog elements and/or analog circuits. Processing unit 930 may implement one or more functions of first device 810 using one or more analog elements and/or analog circuits. In this specification, the expression "A and/or B" should be interpreted as "A or B" or "A and B."
 <2-12.第2の装置の構成>
 第2の装置820は、デルタシグマ変調部111と、NN処理部112と、NN学習部113とを備える。
<2-12. Configuration of the second device>
The second device 820 comprises a delta-sigma modulation section 111 , an NN processing section 112 and an NN learning section 113 .
 図10は、第2の装置820のハードウェア構成の一例を示す図である。第2の装置820は、通信インタフェース1010と、記憶部1020と、処理部1030とを備える。 FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of the second device 820. As shown in FIG. The second device 820 comprises a communication interface 1010 , a storage section 1020 and a processing section 1030 .
 通信インタフェース1010は、他の装置との通信のためのインタフェースである。通信インタフェース1010は、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810と通信するための接続端子及び接続回路等を含む。通信インタフェース1010は、第2の通信経路132を介して第1の装置810と通信するための接続端子及び接続回路等を含む。 A communication interface 1010 is an interface for communication with other devices. The communication interface 1010 includes connection terminals, connection circuits, etc. for communicating with the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 . The communication interface 1010 includes connection terminals, connection circuitry, etc. for communicating with the first device 810 via the second communication path 132 .
 なお、通信インタフェース1010は、コアネットワークのノード(図示省略)と通信するための接続端子及び接続回路等を含んでもよい。更に、通信インタフェース1010は、第1の装置810と無線通信するためのアンテナを含んでもよい。 The communication interface 1010 may include connection terminals, connection circuits, and the like for communicating with nodes (not shown) of the core network. Additionally, communication interface 1010 may include an antenna for wirelessly communicating with first device 810 .
 記憶部1020は、揮発性メモリ及び不揮発性メモリを含む。揮発性メモリは、例えば、RAMを含んでよい。不揮発性メモリは、例えば、ROM、HDD及びSSDのうちの1つ以上を含んでよい。不揮発性メモリは、第2の装置820の1つ以上の機能を実現するためのプログラムコード(インストラクション)を記憶する。 The storage unit 1020 includes volatile memory and nonvolatile memory. Volatile memory may include, for example, RAM. Non-volatile memory may include, for example, one or more of ROM, HDD and SSD. The non-volatile memory stores program code (instructions) for implementing one or more functions of the second device 820 .
 処理部1030は、1つ以上のプロセッサを含む。当該1つ以上のプロセッサは、例えば、CPU、MPU及びマイクロコントローラのうちの1つ以上を含んでよい。処理部1030は、記憶部1020に記憶されたプログラムコード(インストラクション)を実行することにより、第2の装置820の1つ以上の機能を実現する。 The processing unit 1030 includes one or more processors. The one or more processors may include, for example, one or more of a CPU, MPU and microcontroller. The processing unit 1030 implements one or more functions of the second device 820 by executing program codes (instructions) stored in the storage unit 1020 .
 処理部1030は、1つ以上のアナログ素子及び/又はアナログ回路を含んでもよい。処理部1030は、1つ以上のアナログ素子及び/又はアナログ回路を用いて、第2の装置820の1つ以上の機能を実現してもよい。 The processing unit 1030 may include one or more analog elements and/or analog circuits. The processing unit 1030 may implement one or more functions of the second device 820 using one or more analog elements and/or analog circuits.
 <2-13.無線通信装置の処理の流れ>
 次に、図11を参照して、無線通信装置800の処理の流れを説明する。図11は、無線通信装置800の処理の流れの一例を示すシーケンス図である。
<2-13. Flow of Processing of Wireless Communication Device>
Next, referring to FIG. 11, the processing flow of wireless communication apparatus 800 will be described. FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 800. As shown in FIG.
 第2の装置820は、図7のステップ701の処理を実行する(1101)。従って、第2の装置820は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信する。 The second device 820 executes the process of step 701 in FIG. 7 (1101). Accordingly, second device 820 transmits a second signal to first device 810 .
 第1の装置810は、第2の信号を受信する。その後、第1の装置810(本例では、情報送信部145)は、伝送関連情報(本例では、第3の信号)を第2の装置820へ送信する(1102)。 The first device 810 receives the second signal. After that, the first device 810 (the information transmitting unit 145 in this example) transmits the transmission-related information (the third signal in this example) to the second device 820 (1102).
 第2の装置820は、伝送関連情報を受信し、図7のステップ702~ステップ704の処理を実行する(1103)。 The second device 820 receives the transmission-related information and executes the processing of steps 702 to 704 in FIG. 7 (1103).
 第2の装置820は、図7のステップ705の処理を実行する(1104)。従って、第2の装置820は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信する。その後、ステップ1102~ステップ1104の処理が繰り返し実行される。 The second device 820 executes the process of step 705 in FIG. 7 (1104). Accordingly, second device 820 transmits a second signal to first device 810 . After that, the processing of steps 1102 to 1104 is repeatedly executed.
 なお、第1の装置810の情報送信部145は、予め決定されたルールに従って、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820に送信してもよい。情報送信部145は、周期的に(即ち、所定の時間間隔で)伝送関連情報を第2の装置820に送信してもよい。情報送信部145は、非周期的に伝送関連情報を第2の装置820に送信してもよい。 It should be noted that the information transmitting section 145 of the first device 810 may transmit transmission-related information to the second device 820 according to a predetermined rule. The information transmitter 145 may periodically (ie, at predetermined time intervals) transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 . The information transmitter 145 may aperiodically transmit transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
 上記構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の装置810は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820にフィードバックすることができる。第2の装置820は、伝送関連情報を受信して、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みに対する適切な処理を実行することができる。例えば、第2の装置820は、伝送関連情報を用いて第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを更新する。これにより、第2の装置820は、伝送歪みを抑える成分を含む第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信することができる。従って、2つの装置(第1の装置810及び第2の装置820)の間の伝送を改善することができる。 The above configuration has the following effects. The first device 810 can feed back transmission related information to the second device 820 . The second device 820 can receive the transmission-related information and perform appropriate processing for transmission distortion caused during the transmission process of the second signal. For example, the second device 820 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 with transmission related information. This allows second device 820 to transmit to first device 810 a second signal containing a component for suppressing transmission distortion. Therefore, the transmission between the two devices (the first device 810 and the second device 820) can be improved.
 <2-14.変形例>
 本開示に係る技術は、上述した実施形態には限定されない。
<2-14. Variation>
The technology according to the present disclosure is not limited to the above-described embodiments.
 (1)第1変形例
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、ローパスタイプのデバイスであってもよい。図12は、デルタシグマ変調部111の構成の一例を示す図である。以降において、第1の信号に含まれるI信号は、「第1のI信号」と称呼される。第1の信号に含まれるQ信号は、「第1のQ信号」と称呼される。
(1) First Modification The delta-sigma modulation section 111 may be a low-pass type device. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the delta-sigma modulation section 111. As shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the I signal included in the first signal is referred to as "first I signal". A Q signal included in the first signal is referred to as a "first Q signal".
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、ダウンコンバータ1210と、第1のループフィルタ1220と、第2のループフィルタ1230と、第1の量子化器1240と、第2の量子化器1250と、アップコンバータ1260とを備える。 Delta-sigma modulation section 111 includes down converter 1210, first loop filter 1220, second loop filter 1230, first quantizer 1240, second quantizer 1250, and up converter 1260. Prepare.
 ダウンコンバータ1210は、第1の乗算器1211aと、第2の乗算器1211bとを備える。 The downconverter 1210 includes a first multiplier 1211a and a second multiplier 1211b.
 第1の乗算器1211aは、第4の信号に対してcosωtを乗算して、第4の信号のI成分を生成する。ここで、ω=2×π×f0である。以降において、第4の信号から生成されたI成分は、「第2のI信号」と称呼される。第1の乗算器1211aは、第2のI信号を第1のループフィルタ1220に出力する。 The first multiplier 1211a multiplies the fourth signal by cosωt to generate the I component of the fourth signal. where ω=2×π×f0. Hereinafter, the I component generated from the fourth signal will be referred to as the "second I signal". First multiplier 1211 a outputs the second I signal to first loop filter 1220 .
 第2の乗算器1211bは、第4の信号に対して-sinωtを乗算して、第4の信号のQ成分を生成する。以降において、第4の信号から生成されたQ成分は、「第2のQ信号」と称呼される。第2の乗算器1211bは、第2のQ信号を第2のループフィルタ1230に出力する。 The second multiplier 1211b multiplies the fourth signal by -sinωt to generate the Q component of the fourth signal. Hereinafter, the Q component generated from the fourth signal will be referred to as the "second Q signal". Second multiplier 1211 b outputs the second Q signal to second loop filter 1230 .
 このように、ダウンコンバータ1210は、第4の信号を第2のI信号及び第2のQ信号へとダウンコンバートする。 Thus, downconverter 1210 downconverts the fourth signal into a second I signal and a second Q signal.
 なお、信号のサンプリングレートをターゲットの周波数f0の1/4倍、即ち、f0/4と設定した場合、cosωtの信号例は、[1,0,-1,0,1,…]となり、-sinωtの信号列は、[0,-1,0,1,0,…]となる。ここでの記号「/」は、除算を表す。これにより、上述した乗算処理が簡素化される。本変形例は、このような処理を含んでもよい。 When the sampling rate of the signal is set to 1/4 times the target frequency f0, that is, f0/4, the signal example of cosωt is [1, 0, −1, 0, 1, . The signal train of sinωt is [0, −1, 0, 1, 0, . . . ]. The symbol "/" here represents division. This simplifies the multiplication process described above. This modification may include such processing.
 第1のループフィルタ1220は、フィードバック成分(即ち、第2のI信号)に含まれる伝送歪みを抑制するための処理を実行する。具体的には、第1のループフィルタ1220は、第1のI信号と第2のI信号とを用いて、第2の信号の伝送過程(即ち、伝送経路120)において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を抑制するための第1の成分を含む信号を出力する。 The first loop filter 1220 performs processing for suppressing transmission distortion included in the feedback component (that is, the second I signal). Specifically, the first loop filter 1220 uses the first I signal and the second I signal to reduce at least one of the transmission distortions that occur in the transmission process of the second signal (that is, the transmission path 120). outputs a signal that includes a first component for suppressing the part.
 第1のループフィルタ1220は、第1の加算器1221aと、第2の加算器1221bと、伝達関数処理部1222とを備える。 The first loop filter 1220 includes a first adder 1221a, a second adder 1221b, and a transfer function processing section 1222.
 第1の加算器1221aは、第1のI信号と、第2のI信号とを加算する。第1の加算器1221aは、加算結果を伝達関数処理部1222に出力する。ここで、第1の加算器1221aの出力は、第1のI信号と第2のI信号との差分である。他の言い方をすれば、第1の加算器1221aの出力は、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みの成分の一部を含む。 The first adder 1221a adds the first I signal and the second I signal. The first adder 1221 a outputs the addition result to the transfer function processing section 1222 . Here, the output of the first adder 1221a is the difference between the first I signal and the second I signal. In other words, the output of the first adder 1221a contains part of the transmission distortion component that occurs during the transmission process of the second signal.
 伝達関数処理部1222は、第1の加算器1221aの出力に対して伝達関数を適用して、伝送経路120において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を抑制するための第1の成分を出力する。伝達関数は、本例におけるデルタシグマ変調の特性を決定する関数であり、所望の信号伝達関数及び雑音伝達関数等に基づいて決定される。 The transfer function processing unit 1222 applies a transfer function to the output of the first adder 1221a and outputs a first component for suppressing at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the transmission path 120. The transfer function is a function that determines the characteristics of the delta-sigma modulation in this example, and is determined based on the desired signal transfer function, noise transfer function, and the like.
 第2の加算器1221bは、第1のI信号と伝達関数処理部1222の出力とを加算し、加算結果を第1の量子化器1240に出力する。 The second adder 1221 b adds the first I signal and the output of the transfer function processing section 1222 and outputs the addition result to the first quantizer 1240 .
 第1の量子化器1240は、1ビット量子化器である。第1の量子化器1240は、第2の加算器1221bの出力を1ビットで量子化し、第1の量子化信号をアップコンバータ1260に出力する。 The first quantizer 1240 is a 1-bit quantizer. First quantizer 1240 quantizes the output of second adder 1221 b by 1 bit and outputs a first quantized signal to upconverter 1260 .
 第2のループフィルタ1230は、フィードバック成分(即ち、第2のQ信号)に含まれる伝送歪みを抑制するための処理を実行する。具体的には、第2のループフィルタ1230は、第1のQ信号と第2のQ信号とを用いて、第2の信号の伝送過程(即ち、伝送経路120)において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を抑制するための第2の成分を含む信号を出力する。 The second loop filter 1230 performs processing for suppressing transmission distortion included in the feedback component (that is, the second Q signal). Specifically, the second loop filter 1230 uses the first Q signal and the second Q signal to reduce at least one of the transmission distortions that occur in the transmission process of the second signal (that is, the transmission path 120). outputs a signal containing a second component for suppressing the part.
 第2のループフィルタ1230は、第1の加算器1231aと、第2の加算器1231bと、伝達関数処理部1232とを備える。 The second loop filter 1230 includes a first adder 1231a, a second adder 1231b, and a transfer function processing section 1232.
 第1の加算器1231aは、第1のQ信号と、第2のQ信号とを加算する。第1の加算器1231aは、加算結果を伝達関数処理部1232に出力する。ここで、第1の加算器1231aの出力は、第1のQ信号と第2のQ信号との差分である。他の言い方をすれば、第1の加算器1231aの出力は、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みの成分の一部を含む。 The first adder 1231a adds the first Q signal and the second Q signal. The first adder 1231 a outputs the addition result to the transfer function processing section 1232 . Here, the output of the first adder 1231a is the difference between the first Q signal and the second Q signal. In other words, the output of the first adder 1231a contains part of the transmission distortion component that occurs in the transmission process of the second signal.
 伝達関数処理部1232は、第1の加算器1231aの出力に対して伝達関数を適用して、伝送経路120において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を抑制するための第2の成分を出力する。伝達関数は、本例におけるデルタシグマ変調の特性を決定する関数であり、所望の信号伝達関数及び雑音伝達関数に基づいて決定される。 The transfer function processing unit 1232 applies a transfer function to the output of the first adder 1231a and outputs a second component for suppressing at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in the transmission path 120. The transfer function is the function that determines the characteristics of the delta-sigma modulation in this example, and is determined based on the desired signal transfer function and noise transfer function.
 第2の加算器1231bは、第1のQ信号と、伝達関数処理部1232の出力とを加算し、加算結果を第2の量子化器1250に出力する。 The second adder 1231 b adds the first Q signal and the output of the transfer function processing section 1232 and outputs the addition result to the second quantizer 1250 .
 第2の量子化器1250は、1ビット量子化器である。第2の量子化器1250は、第2の加算器1231bの出力を1ビットで量子化し、第2の量子化信号をアップコンバータ1260に出力する。 The second quantizer 1250 is a 1-bit quantizer. Second quantizer 1250 quantizes the output of second adder 1231 b by 1 bit and outputs a second quantized signal to upconverter 1260 .
 アップコンバータ1260は、2入力1出力の構成要素である。アップコンバータ1260は、第1の乗算器1261aと、第2の乗算器1261bと、加算器1262とを備える。 The upconverter 1260 is a 2-input, 1-output component. Upconverter 1260 comprises a first multiplier 1261 a , a second multiplier 1261 b and an adder 1262 .
 第1の乗算器1261aは、第1の量子化信号に対してcosωtを乗算して、乗算結果を加算器1262に出力する。 The first multiplier 1261 a multiplies the first quantized signal by cos ωt and outputs the multiplication result to the adder 1262 .
 第2の乗算器1261bは、第2の量子化信号に対して-sinωtを乗算して、乗算結果を加算器1262に出力する。 The second multiplier 1261 b multiplies the second quantized signal by -sinωt and outputs the multiplication result to the adder 1262 .
 加算器1262は、第1の乗算器1261aの出力と第2の乗算器1261bの出力とを加算して、第2の信号を出力する。このように、アップコンバータ1260は、第1の量子化信号と第2の量子化信号とをアップコンバートして、第2の信号を出力する。 The adder 1262 adds the output of the first multiplier 1261a and the output of the second multiplier 1261b to output a second signal. Thus, upconverter 1260 upconverts the first quantized signal and the second quantized signal to output a second signal.
 なお、信号のサンプリングレートを所望の周波数f0の1/4倍、即ち、f0/4と設定した場合、cosωtの信号例は、[1,0,-1,0,1,…]となり、-sinωtの信号列は、[0,-1,0,1,0,…]となる。ここでの記号「/」は、除算を表す。これにより、上記の乗算処理が簡素化される。更に、第1の量子化器1240の出力及び第2の量子化器1250の出力が二値化された信号例である(即ち、1又は-1の何れかである)ので、加算器1262の出力もまた、二値化された信号例である。アップコンバータ1260の処理によって信号の量子化が損われない。本変形例は、このような処理を含んでもよい。 When the sampling rate of the signal is set to 1/4 times the desired frequency f0, that is, f0/4, the signal example of cosωt is [1, 0, −1, 0, 1, . The signal train of sinωt is [0, −1, 0, 1, 0, . . . ]. The symbol "/" here represents division. This simplifies the multiplication process described above. Furthermore, since the output of the first quantizer 1240 and the output of the second quantizer 1250 are binarized signal instances (ie, either 1 or -1), the output of the adder 1262 is The output is also a binarized signal example. The processing of upconverter 1260 does not impair the quantization of the signal. This modification may include such processing.
 上記構成は以下の効果を奏する。第4の信号(第1のNN300の出力)が、ダウンコンバータ1210を介して第1のループフィルタ1220及び第2のループフィルタ1230にフィードバックされる。これにより、デルタシグマ変調部111は、ターゲットの周波数f0の信号成分を通過させて、周波数f0の近傍の雑音を帯域外に移行させるノイズシェーピングを行うことができる。 The above configuration has the following effects. A fourth signal (output of first NN 300 ) is fed back to first loop filter 1220 and second loop filter 1230 via downconverter 1210 . As a result, the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 can pass the signal component of the target frequency f0 and perform noise shaping to shift noise in the vicinity of the frequency f0 out of the band.
 なお、第1のループフィルタ1220において、第2の加算器1221bが省略されてもよい。この場合、伝達関数処理部1222の出力が、第1の量子化器1240に入力される。伝達関数処理部1222における伝達関数は、伝達関数処理部1222の出力が第1のI信号と上記の第1の成分とを含むように、設定される。 Note that in the first loop filter 1220, the second adder 1221b may be omitted. In this case, the output of transfer function processing section 1222 is input to first quantizer 1240 . The transfer function in transfer function processor 1222 is set such that the output of transfer function processor 1222 includes the first I signal and the first component.
 第2のループフィルタ1230において、第2の加算器1231bが省略されてもよい。この場合、伝達関数処理部1232の出力が、第2の量子化器1250に入力される。伝達関数処理部1232における伝達関数は、伝達関数処理部1232の出力が第1のQ信号と上記の第2の成分とを含むように、設定される。 In the second loop filter 1230, the second adder 1231b may be omitted. In this case, the output of transfer function processing section 1232 is input to second quantizer 1250 . The transfer function in transfer function processor 1232 is set such that the output of transfer function processor 1232 includes the first Q signal and the second component.
 (2)第2変形例
 第1のNN300は、伝送経路120の一部を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力するように構成されてもよい。一例として、第1のNN300は、第2の信号が通信経路130を通過する過程を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力する。この構成によれば、伝送経路120において生じる伝送歪みの少なくとも一部を抑制することができる。
(2) Second Modification The first NN 300 may be configured to output an approximation of the signal generated through part of the transmission path 120 . As an example, first NN 300 outputs an approximation of the signal generated by the second signal passing through communication path 130 . With this configuration, at least part of the transmission distortion that occurs in transmission path 120 can be suppressed.
 (3)第3変形例
 第1のNN300は、上記の例に限定されない。図13は、第1のNN300の構成の一例を示す図である。
(3) Third Modification The first NN 300 is not limited to the above example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the first NN 300. As shown in FIG.
 入力層310は、入力層310内の2つのノードの論理演算の結果が入力されるノード310c及び310dを含んでもよい。例えば、論理演算は、論理積(AND)及び排他的論理和(XOR)等を含んでもよい。なお、入力層310は、2つのノードの論理演算の第1の結果と、2つのノードの論理演算の第2の結果との間の論理演算が入力されるノードを含んでもよい。即ち、入力層310は、入力層310内の2つ以上のノードの論理演算の結果が入力されるノードを含んでもよい。 The input layer 310 may include nodes 310c and 310d to which the results of logic operations of two nodes in the input layer 310 are input. For example, logical operations may include logical AND (AND) and exclusive OR (XOR), and the like. Note that the input layer 310 may include a node to which a logical operation between a first result of the logical operation of two nodes and a second result of the logical operation of the two nodes is input. That is, the input layer 310 may include nodes to which results of logic operations of two or more nodes in the input layer 310 are input.
 上記構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1のNN300は、第2の信号が伝送経路120を通過する過程において生じる符号間干渉等の非線形な歪みを効率的に生成することができる。第1のNN300によって出力される第4の信号の精度が向上する。 The above configuration has the following effects. The first NN 300 can efficiently generate nonlinear distortion such as inter-symbol interference that occurs while the second signal passes through the transmission path 120 . The accuracy of the fourth signal output by the first NN 300 is improved.
 図14は、第1のNN300の構成の一例を示す図である。ノード310aは、第2の信号の現在の値が中間層320を介さずに出力層330へと出力される出力線(接続線)を有していてもよい。 FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the first NN300. Node 310 a may have an output line (connection line) through which the current value of the second signal is output to output layer 330 without going through intermediate layer 320 .
 上記構成は以下の効果を奏する。第2の信号の現在の値が中間層320を経由しないので、第2の信号の現在の値に対して重みが適用されない。第1のNN300は、現在の入力値との残差を効率的に第4の信号に反映させることができる。第1のNN300によって出力される第4の信号の精度が向上する。 The above configuration has the following effects. No weight is applied to the current value of the second signal because the current value of the second signal does not pass through the hidden layer 320 . The first NN 300 can efficiently reflect the residual from the current input value in the fourth signal. The accuracy of the fourth signal output by the first NN 300 is improved.
 なお、第1のNN300は、上述した構成の組み合わせであってもよい。入力層310は、第2の信号の現在の値が入力されるノードを少なくとも含む。入力層310は、第2の信号の過去の値が入力されるノードと、入力層310内の2つ以上のノードの論理演算の結果が入力されるノードと、第2の信号の現在の値が中間層320を介さずに出力層330へと出力される出力線を有するノードと、の少なくとも1つを更に含んでよい。更に、第1のNN300は、公知の様々な構造を含んでもよい。 Note that the first NN 300 may be a combination of the configurations described above. Input layer 310 includes at least a node into which the current value of the second signal is input. The input layer 310 includes a node to which the past value of the second signal is input, a node to which the result of logical operation of two or more nodes in the input layer 310 is input, and a current value of the second signal. and a node having an output line that outputs to the output layer 330 without going through the intermediate layer 320 . Additionally, the first NN 300 may include various known structures.
 (4)第4変形例
 デルタシグマ変調装置110の処理の流れは、上述の例に限定されない。図15は、デルタシグマ変調装置110の処理の流れの一例を示すフローチャートである。図15のフローチャートは、図7のフローチャートにステップ1501が追加されたフローチャートである。
(4) Fourth Modification The processing flow of the delta-sigma modulation device 110 is not limited to the above example. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing flow of the delta-sigma modulation device 110. As shown in FIG. The flowchart in FIG. 15 is a flowchart in which step 1501 is added to the flowchart in FIG.
 ステップ701の後、NN学習部113は、所定の第1の条件が成立するか否かを判定する(1501)。第1の条件が成立する場合、デルタシグマ変調装置110は、ステップ702の処理及びステップ703の処理を実行する。従って、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータ及び第2のNN600の第2のパラメータが更新される。 After step 701, the NN learning unit 113 determines whether or not a predetermined first condition is satisfied (1501). If the first condition is satisfied, the delta-sigma modulation device 110 executes the processing of steps 702 and 703 . Accordingly, the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 are updated.
 第1の条件が成立しない場合、デルタシグマ変調装置110は、ステップ702の処理及ステップ703の処理を実行しない。即ち、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータ及び第2のNN600の第2のパラメータが更新されない。 If the first condition is not satisfied, the delta-sigma modulation device 110 does not execute the processing of step 702 and the processing of step 703. That is, the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 are not updated.
 第1の条件は、近似誤差が所定の第1の大きさよりも大きいという条件である。具体的には、近似誤差が第1の差分の絶対値と第2の差分の絶対値とのうちの大きい方である場合、第1の条件は、近似誤差が所定の第1の閾値Th1よりも大きいという条件であってもよい。近似誤差が複素数によって表現される場合、第1の条件は、複素数の絶対値(即ち、複素数平面上での原点からの距離)に関する条件であってもよい。第1の条件は、近似誤差の絶対値(原点からの距離)が所定の第1の距離閾値よりも大きいという条件であってもよい。他の例において、第1の条件は、第1の差分に対する条件と、第2の差分に対する条件とを含んでもよい。例えば、第1の差分の絶対値が所定の第1の実数成分閾値を超える及び/又は第2の差分の絶対値が所定の第1の虚数成分閾値を超えた場合、NN学習部113は、第1の条件が成立すると判定してもよい。 The first condition is that the approximation error is larger than a predetermined first magnitude. Specifically, when the approximation error is the larger one of the absolute value of the first difference and the absolute value of the second difference, the first condition is that the approximation error is greater than a predetermined first threshold value Th1. may also be a condition that is large. When the approximation error is represented by a complex number, the first condition may be a condition regarding the absolute value of the complex number (that is, the distance from the origin on the complex number plane). The first condition may be that the absolute value of the approximation error (distance from the origin) is greater than a predetermined first distance threshold. In another example, the first condition may include a condition for the first difference and a condition for the second difference. For example, when the absolute value of the first difference exceeds a predetermined first real component threshold and/or the absolute value of the second difference exceeds a predetermined first imaginary component threshold, the NN learning unit 113 It may be determined that the first condition is satisfied.
 伝送経路120の状態は刻々と変化する。デルタシグマ変調装置110は、上記のような第1の条件を用いることにより、伝送経路120の現在の状態に応じて第1のNN300の第1のパラメータ及び第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを更新することができる。 The state of the transmission path 120 changes from moment to moment. The delta-sigma modulator 110 modulates the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 according to the current state of the transmission path 120 by using the first condition as described above. can be updated.
 上述したように、近似誤差が大きい場合、これは、伝送モデル410の出力(第3の信号の近似値)が実際の第3の信号から離れていることを意味する。即ち、これは、伝送モデル410の出力の精度が低く、且つ、第1のNN300によって出力される第4の信号の精度も低いことを意味する。従って、伝送経路120の現在の状態(特に、伝送歪みに関する情報)を第1のNN300及び第2のNN600に反映させる必要性が高い。従って、第1の条件が成立する場合、NN学習部113は、ステップ1501において「Yes」と判定する。そして、デルタシグマ変調装置110は、ステップ702の処理及びステップ703の処理を実行する。 As described above, if the approximation error is large, this means that the output of the transmission model 410 (the approximation of the third signal) is far from the actual third signal. This means that the accuracy of the output of the transmission model 410 is low and the accuracy of the fourth signal output by the first NN 300 is also low. Therefore, it is highly necessary to reflect the current state of the transmission path 120 (in particular, information on transmission distortion) to the first NN 300 and the second NN 600 . Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, the NN learning unit 113 determines “Yes” in step 1501 . Then, the delta-sigma modulation device 110 executes the processing of steps 702 and 703 .
 一方で、近似誤差が小さい場合、これは、伝送モデル410の出力が実際の第3の信号に近いことを意味する。従って、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータ及び第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを更新する必要性が低い。従って、NN学習部113は、ステップ1501において「No」と判定する。そして、デルタシグマ変調装置110は、ステップ704へと進む。 On the other hand, if the approximation error is small, this means that the output of transmission model 410 is close to the actual third signal. Therefore, the need to update the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 is low. Therefore, NN learning section 113 determines “No” in step 1501 . Delta-sigma modulator 110 then proceeds to step 704 .
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。伝送経路120の現在の状態を第1のNN300及び第2のNN600に反映させる必要性が高い場合にのみ、デルタシグマ変調装置110は、ステップ702及びステップ703の処理を実行する。デルタシグマ変調装置110は、不要な状況においてステップ702及びステップ703の処理を実行しないので、デルタシグマ変調装置110における処理負荷を抑えることができる。 The above configuration has the following effects. The delta-sigma modulator 110 executes the processing of steps 702 and 703 only when it is highly necessary to reflect the current state of the transmission path 120 on the first NN 300 and the second NN 600 . Since the delta-sigma modulation device 110 does not execute the processing of steps 702 and 703 in unnecessary situations, the processing load on the delta-sigma modulation device 110 can be suppressed.
 なお、第1の条件が成立した後、デルタシグマ変調装置110は、所定の第2の条件が成立するまで、ステップ702及びステップ703の処理を繰り返し実行してもよい。具体的には、パラメータ計算部430は、第2の条件が成立するまで、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する処理を継続する。パラメータ計算部430は、第2の条件が成立するまで、第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを更新する処理を継続する。NN処理部112は、第2の条件が成立するまで、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを更新する処理を継続する。 After the first condition is satisfied, the delta-sigma modulation device 110 may repeatedly execute the processing of steps 702 and 703 until a predetermined second condition is satisfied. Specifically, the parameter calculator 430 continues the process of calculating the first parameter and the second parameter until the second condition is satisfied. Parameter calculator 430 continues the process of updating the second parameter of second NN 600 until the second condition is satisfied. The NN processing unit 112 continues the process of updating the first parameter of the first NN 300 until the second condition is satisfied.
 第2の条件は、近似誤差が所定の第2の大きさよりも小さいという条件である。第2の大きさは、上記の第1の大きさよりも小さい。具体的には、近似誤差が第1の差分の絶対値と第2の差分の絶対値とのうちの大きい方である場合、第2の条件は、近似誤差が所定の第2の閾値Th2よりも小さいという条件であってもよい。第2の閾値Th2は、第1の閾値Th1よりも小さい。近似誤差が複素数によって表現される場合、第2の条件は、複素数の絶対値(即ち、複素数平面上での原点からの距離)に関する条件であってもよい。第2の条件は、近似誤差の絶対値(原点からの距離)が所定の第2の距離閾値よりも小さいという条件であってもよい。第2の距離閾値は、第1の距離閾値よりも小さい。他の例において、第2の条件は、第1の差分に対する条件と、第2の差分に対する条件とを含んでもよい。例えば、第1の差分の絶対値が所定の第2の実数成分閾値を下回る及び/又は第2の差分の絶対値が所定の第2の虚数成分閾値を下回る場合、NN学習部113は、第2の条件が成立すると判定してもよい。例えば、第2の実数成分閾値は、第1の実数成分閾値よりも小さい。第2の虚数成分閾値は、第1の虚数成分閾値よりも小さい。 The second condition is that the approximation error is smaller than a predetermined second magnitude. The second magnitude is less than the first magnitude. Specifically, when the approximation error is the larger one of the absolute value of the first difference and the absolute value of the second difference, the second condition is that the approximation error is greater than the predetermined second threshold Th2. may also be a condition that is small. The second threshold Th2 is smaller than the first threshold Th1. If the approximation error is represented by a complex number, the second condition may be a condition regarding the absolute value of the complex number (that is, the distance from the origin on the complex number plane). The second condition may be that the absolute value of the approximation error (distance from the origin) is smaller than a predetermined second distance threshold. The second distance threshold is less than the first distance threshold. In another example, the second condition may include a condition for the first difference and a condition for the second difference. For example, when the absolute value of the first difference is below a predetermined second real component threshold and/or the absolute value of the second difference is below a predetermined second imaginary component threshold, the NN learning unit 113 It may be determined that condition 2 is established. For example, the second real component threshold is less than the first real component threshold. The second imaginary component threshold is less than the first imaginary component threshold.
 (5)第5変形例
 NN学習部113の構成は、上記の例に限定されない。図16は、NN学習部113の構成の一例を示す図である。
(5) Fifth Modification The configuration of the NN learning unit 113 is not limited to the above example. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the NN learning unit 113. As shown in FIG.
 NN学習部113は、遅延調整部1610と、ゲイン調整部1620とを更に含む。 NN learning section 113 further includes delay adjustment section 1610 and gain adjustment section 1620 .
 遅延調整部1610は、第2の信号を入力信号として受け取る。遅延調整部1610は、伝送モデル410の出力が誤差計算部420に入力されるタイミングと、第3の信号が誤差計算部420に入力されるタイミングとが同期するように、第2の信号を遅延させる。 The delay adjusting section 1610 receives the second signal as an input signal. Delay adjustment section 1610 delays the second signal so that the timing at which the output of transmission model 410 is input to error calculation section 420 and the timing at which the third signal is input to error calculation section 420 are synchronized. Let
 ゲイン調整部1620は、第3の信号を入力信号として受け取る。ゲイン調整部1620は、第3の信号に対してゲインを乗算する。具体的には、ゲイン調整部1620は、第3の信号を複素数と見なして、第3の信号に含まれるI信号及びQ信号のそれぞれに対して複素ゲインを乗算する。 The gain adjustment section 1620 receives the third signal as an input signal. Gain adjustment section 1620 multiplies the third signal by the gain. Specifically, gain adjustment section 1620 regards the third signal as a complex number, and multiplies each of the I and Q signals included in the third signal by the complex gain.
 なお、遅延調整部1610における遅延値及びゲイン調整部1620における複素ゲインは、誤差計算部420の出力である近似誤差が最小になるように、設定される。 The delay value in delay adjustment section 1610 and the complex gain in gain adjustment section 1620 are set so that the approximation error output from error calculation section 420 is minimized.
 (6)第6変形例
 変調部144は、スーパーヘテロダイン方式によって増幅器143の出力をダウンコンバートして、IF信号を出力してもよい。
(6) Sixth Modification The modulation section 144 may down-convert the output of the amplifier 143 by a superheterodyne method and output an IF signal.
 (7)第7変形例
 伝送経路120内の変調部144が省略されてもよい。この構成において、伝送モデル410内のデジタルダウンコンバータ620が省略される。誤差計算部420は、伝送モデル410の出力と、第3の信号(この例では、増幅器143の出力)との間の近似誤差を計算する。
(7) Seventh Modification The modulation section 144 in the transmission path 120 may be omitted. In this configuration, digital downconverter 620 in transmission model 410 is omitted. Error calculator 420 calculates an approximation error between the output of transmission model 410 and the third signal (the output of amplifier 143 in this example).
 (8)第8変形例
 伝送モデル410の構成は、上記の例に限定されない。伝送モデル410の構成は、デルタシグマ変調装置110の構成及び伝送経路120の構成に従って、適宜変更されてもよい。例えば、一般的に使われているデジタル歪補償技術が第1の信号(I信号及びQ信号)に適用されてもよい。これに従って、伝送モデル410の構成が変更されてもよい。
(8) Eighth Modified Example The configuration of the transmission model 410 is not limited to the above example. The configuration of transmission model 410 may be changed as appropriate according to the configuration of delta-sigma modulator 110 and the configuration of transmission path 120 . For example, commonly used digital distortion compensation techniques may be applied to the first signals (I and Q signals). The configuration of transmission model 410 may be modified accordingly.
 第2のNN600は、伝送経路120の全体をモデル化したニューラルネットワークであってもよい。 The second NN 600 may be a neural network that models the entire transmission path 120.
 変調部144がスーパーヘテロダイン方式によって増幅器143の出力をダウンコンバートする構成を有する場合、伝送モデル410は、これに対応する構成要素を含んでもよい。伝送モデル410は、スーパーヘテロダイン方式によってデジタルフィルタ610の出力からIF信号を出力する構成要素を含んでもよい。 If the modulation section 144 has a configuration that down-converts the output of the amplifier 143 by superheterodyne, the transmission model 410 may include components corresponding to this. Transmission model 410 may include components that output the IF signal from the output of digital filter 610 in a superheterodyne fashion.
 増幅器143が第2のNN600としてモデル化されず、増幅器143が個別でモデル化されてもよい。別の例において、増幅器143のモデル化が省略されてもよい。 Amplifier 143 may not be modeled as second NN 600 and amplifier 143 may be modeled separately. In another example, modeling of amplifier 143 may be omitted.
 第2のNN600は、伝送経路120の一部をモデル化した構成要素であってもよい。例えば、第2のNN600は、第1のNN300と同じ信号(第4の信号)を出力するニューラルネットワークであってもよい。即ち、第2のNN600は、第2の信号が、通信経路130、BPF142及び増幅器143を通過する過程を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力してもよい。 The second NN 600 may be a component that models part of the transmission path 120 . For example, the second NN600 may be a neural network that outputs the same signal (fourth signal) as the first NN300. That is, the second NN 600 may output an approximation of the signal generated by the second signal passing through the communication path 130 , BPF 142 and amplifier 143 .
 第2のNN600は、第1のNN300と同じ構造を備えてもよい。第2のNN600は、入力層と、少なくとも1つの中間層と、出力層とを備える。入力層は、第2の信号の現在の値が入力されるノードを少なくとも含む。入力層は、更に、第2の信号の過去の値が入力されるノードと、入力層内の2つ以上のノードの論理演算の結果が入力されるノードと、第2の信号の現在の値が中間層を介さずに出力層へと出力される出力線を有するノードと、の少なくとも1つを更に含んでもよい。 The second NN 600 may have the same structure as the first NN 300. The second NN 600 comprises an input layer, at least one hidden layer and an output layer. The input layer includes at least a node into which the current value of the second signal is input. The input layer further includes a node to which the past value of the second signal is input, a node to which the result of a logical operation of two or more nodes in the input layer is input, and a current value of the second signal. and a node having an output line from which is output to the output layer without going through the intermediate layer.
 <<3.第2実施形態>>
 続いて、図17~図24を参照して、第2実施形態及びその変形例を説明する。なお、第2実施形態について、第1実施形態と同じ構成要素には同じ符号を付し、それらの構成要素の詳細な説明を省略する。
<<3. Second Embodiment >>
Next, a second embodiment and modifications thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 24. FIG. In addition, about 2nd Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same component as 1st Embodiment, and detailed description of those components is abbreviate|omitted.
 <3-1.無線通信装置の概略構成>
 図17は、無線通信装置1700の構成を示す図である。無線通信装置1700は、第1の装置810と、第2の装置820とを備える。
<3-1. Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the configuration of wireless communication apparatus 1700. As shown in FIG. Wireless communication device 1700 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 .
 第1の通信経路131は、光ファイバ131aを含む。第1の通信経路131は、光ファイバ131aの第2の装置820の側の端部において、E/O変換部131bを備える。E/O変換部131bは、電気信号を光信号に変換する。更に、第1の通信経路131は、光ファイバ131aの第1の装置810の側の端部において、O/E変換部131cを備える。O/E変換部131cは、光信号を電気信号に変換する。 The first communication path 131 includes an optical fiber 131a. The first communication path 131 includes an E/O converter 131b at the end of the optical fiber 131a on the second device 820 side. The E/O converter 131b converts an electrical signal into an optical signal. Further, the first communication path 131 includes an O/E converter 131c at the end of the optical fiber 131a on the first device 810 side. The O/E converter 131c converts the optical signal into an electrical signal.
 第2の通信経路132は、光ファイバ132aを含む。第2の通信経路132は、光ファイバ132aの第2の装置820の側の端部において、E/O変換部132bを備える。更に、第2の通信経路132は、光ファイバ132aの第1の装置810の側の端部において、O/E変換部132cを備える。 The second communication path 132 includes an optical fiber 132a. The second communication path 132 includes an E/O converter 132b at the end of the optical fiber 132a on the second device 820 side. Further, the second communication path 132 includes an O/E converter 132c at the end of the optical fiber 132a on the first device 810 side.
 <3-2.第1の装置の構成>
 第1の装置810は、アンテナ141と、BPF142と、増幅器143と、変調部144と、情報送信部145とを備える。情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を、第2の通信経路132を介して第2の装置820へ送信する。本例の伝送関連情報は、第1実施形態と同様に、第3の信号(変調部144の出力)である。
<3-2. Configuration of the first device>
A first device 810 includes an antenna 141 , a BPF 142 , an amplifier 143 , a modulator 144 and an information transmitter 145 . Information transmitting unit 145 transmits the transmission-related information to second device 820 via second communication path 132 . The transmission-related information in this example is the third signal (output of the modulation section 144), as in the first embodiment.
 <3-3.第2の装置の構成>
 第2の装置820は、デルタシグマ変調部111と、NN処理部112と、NN学習部113と、指示送信部114とを備える。デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する。指示送信部114は、後述する指示信号(初期指示信号、第1の指示信号及び第2の指示信号)を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する。
<3-3. Configuration of the second device>
The second device 820 includes a delta-sigma modulation section 111 , an NN processing section 112 , an NN learning section 113 and an instruction transmission section 114 . Delta-sigma modulator 111 transmits the second signal to first device 810 via first communication path 131 . The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits instruction signals (initial instruction signal, first instruction signal, and second instruction signal), which will be described later, to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 .
 <3-4.無線通信装置の処理の流れの概要>
 次に、無線通信装置1700の処理の流れの概要を説明する。具体的には、第1の装置810が第2の装置820へ伝送関連情報を送信する処理の流れについて説明する。
<3-4. Overview of Processing Flow of Wireless Communication Device>
Next, an outline of the processing flow of wireless communication apparatus 1700 will be described. Specifically, the flow of processing in which the first device 810 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 will be described.
 指示送信部114は、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じた歪み量に関する条件が成立するか否かを判定する。例えば、当該条件は、近似誤差に関する上記の第1の条件である。指示送信部114は、第1の条件が成立した場合、第1の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する。 The instruction transmission unit 114 determines whether or not the condition regarding the amount of distortion that occurred in the process of transmitting the second signal is satisfied. For example, the condition is the above first condition regarding the approximation error. The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to the first device 810 when the first condition is satisfied.
 本例において、第1の指示信号は、第2の装置820へ伝送関連情報を送信することを第1の装置810に対して指示する信号である。第1の指示信号は、第1の装置810が第2の装置820へ伝送関連情報を送信する回数Nkについての情報を含む。Nkは、1以上の整数である。情報送信部145は、第1の指示信号に応じて、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。 In this example, the first instruction signal is a signal that instructs the first device 810 to transmit transmission-related information to the second device 820 . The first indication signal contains information about the number of times Nk that the first device 810 sends the transmission related information to the second device 820 . Nk is an integer of 1 or more. Information transmitting section 145 transmits the transmission-related information to second device 820 in response to the first instruction signal.
 指示送信部114は、近似誤差に関する上記の第2の条件が成立したか否かを判定する。指示送信部114は、第2の条件が成立した場合、第2の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する。 The instruction transmission unit 114 determines whether or not the second condition regarding the approximation error is satisfied. The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a second instruction signal to the first device 810 when the second condition is satisfied.
 本例において、第2の指示信号は、第2の装置820への伝送関連情報の送信を停止することを第1の装置810に対して指示する信号である。情報送信部145は、第2の指示信号に応じて、伝送関連情報の送信を停止する。 In this example, the second instruction signal is a signal that instructs the first device 810 to stop sending transmission-related information to the second device 820 . Information transmitting section 145 stops transmitting the transmission-related information in response to the second instruction signal.
 <3-5.無線通信装置の処理の流れ>
 次に、図18を参照して、無線通信装置1700の処理の流れを説明する。図18は、無線通信装置1700の処理の流れの一例を示すシーケンス図である。
<3-5. Flow of Processing of Wireless Communication Device>
Next, referring to FIG. 18, the processing flow of wireless communication apparatus 1700 will be described. FIG. 18 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 1700. As shown in FIG.
 指示送信部114は、初期指示信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する(1801)。初期指示信号は、第1の装置810に、伝送関連情報を1回だけ第2の装置820に送信させるための指示信号である。 The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits an initial instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1801). The initial instruction signal is an instruction signal for causing the first device 810 to transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 only once.
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する(1802)。情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報(本例では、第3の信号)を、第2の通信経路132を介して第2の装置820へ送信する(1803)。 The delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1802). The information transmitter 145 transmits transmission-related information (third signal in this example) to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 (1803).
 第2の装置820は、伝送関連情報を受信する。第2の装置820(即ち、NN処理部112及びNN学習部113)は、図7のステップ702及びステップ703の処理を実行する(1804)。以降において、ステップ702及びステップ703の一連の処理は、まとめて「学習処理」と称呼される。なお、NN学習部113は、ステップ702の処理において計算された近似誤差を指示送信部114へ送信する。 The second device 820 receives transmission-related information. The second device 820 (that is, the NN processing unit 112 and the NN learning unit 113) executes the processing of steps 702 and 703 in FIG. 7 (1804). Hereinafter, a series of processes of steps 702 and 703 are collectively referred to as "learning process". NN learning section 113 transmits the approximation error calculated in the process of step 702 to instruction transmitting section 114 .
 指示送信部114は、近似誤差を用いて第1の条件が成立したか否かを判定する。本例において、指示送信部114は、第1の条件が成立したと判定する(1805)。従って、指示送信部114は、第1の指示信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する(1806)。 The instruction transmission unit 114 uses the approximation error to determine whether the first condition is satisfied. In this example, the instruction transmission unit 114 determines that the first condition is satisfied (1805). Accordingly, the instruction transmitter 114 transmits the first instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1806).
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する(1807)。 The delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1807).
 情報送信部145は、第1の指示信号に応じて、伝送関連情報を、第2の通信経路132を介して第2の装置820へ送信する(1808)。これは、第1の装置810が第1の指示信号を受信した時点を基準として、1回目の伝送関連情報の送信である。 The information transmission unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 in response to the first instruction signal (1808). This is the first transmission of the transmission-related information from the time when the first device 810 received the first instruction signal.
 第2の装置820は、学習処理を実行する(1809)。第2の装置820が学習処理を実行するごとに、指示送信部114は、第2の条件が成立するか否かを判定する。 The second device 820 executes learning processing (1809). Each time second device 820 executes the learning process, instruction sending unit 114 determines whether the second condition is satisfied.
 第2の信号の送信、伝送関連情報の送信及び学習処理が繰り返し実行される。これにより、近似誤差が徐々に小さくなる。 Transmission of the second signal, transmission of transmission-related information, and learning processing are repeatedly executed. This gradually reduces the approximation error.
 その後、デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する(1810)。 The delta-sigma modulator 111 then transmits the second signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1810).
 情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を、第2の通信経路132を介して第2の装置820へ送信する(1811)。これは、第1の装置810が第1の指示信号を受信した時点を基準として、Nj回目の伝送関連情報の送信である。なお、Nj<Nkである。 The information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 (1811). This is the Nj-th transmission of the transmission-related information from when the first device 810 received the first instruction signal. Note that Nj<Nk.
 第2の装置820は、学習処理を実行する(1812)。指示送信部114は、第2の条件が成立すると判定する(1813)。従って、指示送信部114は、第2の指示信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する(1814)。情報送信部145は、第2の指示信号に応じて、伝送関連情報の送信を停止する。 The second device 820 executes learning processing (1812). The instruction transmission unit 114 determines that the second condition is satisfied (1813). Accordingly, the instruction transmitter 114 transmits the second instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 (1814). Information transmitting section 145 stops transmitting the transmission-related information in response to the second instruction signal.
 その後、指示送信部114は、所定の待ち時間Twが経過するごとに、初期指示信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する(1815)。 After that, the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits an initial instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 each time a predetermined waiting time Tw elapses (1815).
 なお、第1の装置810が第1の指示信号を受信した後に情報送信部145が伝送関連情報をNk回送信すると、情報送信部145は伝送関連情報の送信を停止する。指示送信部114は、伝送関連情報をNk回受信した時点から所定の待ち時間Twが経過すると、初期指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する。 When the information transmitting unit 145 transmits the transmission-related information Nk times after the first device 810 receives the first instruction signal, the information transmitting unit 145 stops transmitting the transmission-related information. The instruction transmitting unit 114 transmits an initial instruction signal to the first device 810 when a predetermined waiting time Tw has elapsed since the transmission-related information was received Nk times.
 他の例において、第2の指示信号は、待ち時間Twの情報を更に含んでもよい。この構成において、情報送信部145は、待ち時間Twが経過するごとに、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。指示送信部114は、伝送関連情報を受信するごとに、第1の条件が成立するか否かを判定する。指示送信部114は、第1の条件が成立した場合、第1の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する。 In another example, the second instruction signal may further include information on the waiting time Tw. In this configuration, the information transmitting section 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 each time the waiting time Tw elapses. The instruction transmitting unit 114 determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied each time transmission-related information is received. The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to the first device 810 when the first condition is satisfied.
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の条件が成立した場合(即ち、近似誤差が大きい場合)、これは、伝送経路120の現在の状態(特に、伝送歪みに関する情報)が第1のNN300及び第2のNN600に反映できておらず、従って、伝送歪みが抑制できていないことを意味する。このような状況において、第1の装置810は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820にフィードバックする。第2の装置820は、伝送関連情報を用いて学習処理を実行して、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータ及び第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを更新できる。これにより、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みを抑えることができる。更に、同時接続数及び伝送容量を増大させる分散MIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output)システムを実現できる。 The above configuration has the following effects. If the first condition is satisfied (that is, if the approximation error is large), this means that the current state of the transmission path 120 (in particular, information on transmission distortion) can be reflected in the first NN 300 and the second NN 600. This means that the transmission distortion cannot be suppressed. Under such circumstances, the first device 810 feeds back transmission-related information to the second device 820 . The second device 820 can perform a learning process using the transmission related information to update the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 . As a result, transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal can be suppressed. Furthermore, a distributed MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) system that increases the number of simultaneous connections and transmission capacity can be realized.
 <3-6.変形例>
 本開示に係る技術は、上述した実施形態には限定されない。
<3-6. Variation>
The technology according to the present disclosure is not limited to the above-described embodiments.
 (1)第1変形例
 第1の指示信号は、上記の例に限定されない。第1の指示信号は、第1の装置810が第2の装置820へ伝送関連情報を送信する周期Tpについての情報を含んでもよい。情報送信部145は、第1の指示信号に応じて、周期Tpが経過するごとに、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。
(1) First Modification The first instruction signal is not limited to the above example. The first indication signal may include information about the period Tp with which the first device 810 sends transmission related information to the second device 820 . Information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission-related information to second device 820 every time period Tp elapses in response to the first instruction signal.
 周期Tpは、学習期間のk1倍であってもよい。ここで、k1は、1以上の整数である。学習期間は、第2の装置820が伝送関連情報を受信した時点から、第2の装置820が第1のNN300の第1のパラメータ及び第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを更新するまでに要する期間である。 The period Tp may be k1 times the learning period. Here, k1 is an integer of 1 or more. The learning period is required from the time when the second device 820 receives the transmission-related information until the second device 820 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600. period.
 周期Tpは、3GPP上で定義されるフレーム、サブフレーム又はスロットによって定義されてもよい。フレームは、複数のサブフレームによって定義される。サブフレームは、1以上のスロットによって定義される。周期Tpは、「フレームのk2倍」として定義されてもよい。ここで、k2は、1以上の整数である。一例として、1つのフレームは、10ms(millisecond)である。周期Tpは、「サブフレームのk3倍」として定義されてもよい。ここで、k3は、1以上の整数である。一例として、1つのサブフレームは、1msである。周期Tpは、「スロットのk4倍」として定義されてもよい。ここで、k4は、1以上の整数である。 The period Tp may be defined by frames, subframes or slots defined on 3GPP. A frame is defined by multiple subframes. A subframe is defined by one or more slots. The period Tp may be defined as "k2 times the frame". Here, k2 is an integer of 1 or more. As an example, one frame is 10ms (milliseconds). The period Tp may be defined as "k3 times the subframe". Here, k3 is an integer of 1 or more. As an example, one subframe is 1 ms. The period Tp may be defined as "k4 times the slot". Here, k4 is an integer of 1 or more.
 図19は、無線通信装置1700の処理の流れの一例を示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 19 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the processing flow of the wireless communication device 1700. As shown in FIG.
 指示送信部114は、第1の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(1901)。デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(1902)。情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報(本例では、第3の信号)を第2の装置820へ送信する(1903)。第2の装置820は、学習処理を実行する(1904)。その後、デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ繰り返し送信する(1905)。 The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits the first instruction signal to the first device 810 (1901). Delta-sigma modulator 111 transmits the second signal to first device 810 (1902). The information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information (third signal in this example) to the second device 820 (1903). The second device 820 performs a learning process (1904). Delta-sigma modulator 111 then repeatedly transmits the second signal to first device 810 (1905).
 情報送信部145がステップ1903の処理を実行した時点から周期Tpが経過する。情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する(1906)。第2の装置820は、学習処理を実行する(1907)。その後、情報送信部145は、周期Tpが経過するごとに、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する(1908)。 A cycle Tp has passed since the information transmission unit 145 executed the process of step 1903 . The information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 (1906). The second device 820 performs a learning process (1907). After that, the information transmitting section 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 every time the cycle Tp elapses (1908).
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の装置810は、周期的に、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820にフィードバックする。第2の装置820は、伝送関連情報を用いて周期的に学習処理を実行して、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータ及び第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを更新できる。これにより、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みを抑えることができる。 The above configuration has the following effects. The first device 810 periodically feeds back transmission related information to the second device 820 . The second device 820 can periodically perform a learning process using the transmission related information to update the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 . As a result, transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal can be suppressed.
 (2)第2変形例
 情報送信部145は、第1の装置810と第2の装置820との間の伝送に関する条件が成立した場合に、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信してもよい。例えば、情報送信部145は、第2の信号に基づいて、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じた歪み量を推定してもよい。情報送信部145は、歪み量に関する第3の条件が成立したか否かを判定する。第3の条件は、歪み量が所定の大きさよりも大きいという条件である。情報送信部145は、第3の条件が成立した場合、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。
(2) Second Modification Information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to second device 820 when the conditions for transmission between first device 810 and second device 820 are met. good too. For example, the information transmitting section 145 may estimate the amount of distortion that occurred during the transmission process of the second signal based on the second signal. The information transmission unit 145 determines whether or not the third condition regarding the amount of distortion is satisfied. A third condition is that the distortion amount is greater than a predetermined magnitude. The information transmitting unit 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 when the third condition is satisfied.
 歪み量は、以下のように推定されてもよい。情報送信部145は、第2の信号に対してフーリエ変換処理等を実行して、第2の信号の周波数成分を分析する。第2の信号の伝送過程において生じた歪み量が大きい場合、第2の信号の周波数成分のうち、上述した所望の周波数帯域(f0-fαからf0+fαまでの帯域)の外側の周波数成分が大きい。これを考慮して、情報送信部145は、所望の周波数帯域の外側の帯域の信号電力を計算する。 The amount of distortion may be estimated as follows. The information transmission unit 145 analyzes the frequency components of the second signal by executing Fourier transform processing or the like on the second signal. When the amount of distortion generated in the transmission process of the second signal is large, the frequency components outside the above-described desired frequency band (band from f0-fα to f0+fα) among the frequency components of the second signal are large. Considering this, the information transmitter 145 calculates the signal power of the band outside the desired frequency band.
 第3の条件は、所望の周波数帯域の外側の帯域の信号電力が第3の閾値Th3よりも大きいという条件であってもよい。所望の周波数帯域の外側の帯域の信号電力が大きい場合、情報送信部145は、歪み量が所定の大きさよりも大きいと判定してもよい。 The third condition may be a condition that the signal power in the band outside the desired frequency band is greater than the third threshold Th3. When the signal power of the band outside the desired frequency band is large, the information transmitting section 145 may determine that the distortion amount is larger than a predetermined magnitude.
 なお、フーリエ変換処理の対象となる信号は、図17に示す信号1701~1703の何れであってもよい。
 ・第1の通信経路131を通過した後で且つBPF142を通過する前の信号1701
 ・BPF142を通過した後で且つ増幅器143を通過する前の信号1702
 ・増幅器143を通過した後の信号1703
The signal to be subjected to Fourier transform processing may be any one of the signals 1701 to 1703 shown in FIG.
A signal 1701 after passing through the first communication path 131 and before passing through the BPF 142
- Signal 1702 after passing through BPF 142 and before passing through amplifier 143
- Signal 1703 after passing through amplifier 143
 図20は、無線通信装置1700の処理の流れの一例を示すシーケンス図である。 FIG. 20 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the processing flow of the wireless communication device 1700. As shown in FIG.
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2001)。情報送信部145は、上述のように歪み量を推定し、第3の条件が成立するか否かを判定する(2002)。本例において、情報送信部135は、第3の条件が成立すると判定する(2003)。従って、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する(2004)。第2の装置820は、学習処理を実行する(2005)。その後、デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ繰り返し送信する(2006)。 The delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2001). The information transmitting unit 145 estimates the amount of distortion as described above, and determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied (2002). In this example, the information transmitting unit 135 determines that the third condition is satisfied (2003). Accordingly, the information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 (2004). The second device 820 performs a learning process (2005). The delta-sigma modulator 111 then repeatedly transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2006).
 その後、情報送信部145がステップ2002の処理を実行した時点から第1の時間Taが経過する。情報送信部145は、上述のように歪み量を推定し、第3の条件が成立するか否かを判定する(2007)。このように、情報送信部145は、第1の時間Taが経過するごとに、歪み量を推定する。第3の条件が成立する場合、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。これに対し、第3の条件が成立しない場合、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信しない。 After that, a first time Ta elapses from the time when the information transmission unit 145 executes the process of step 2002. The information transmitting unit 145 estimates the distortion amount as described above, and determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied (2007). In this way, the information transmitting section 145 estimates the distortion amount each time the first time Ta elapses. If the third condition is satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission related information to the second device 820 . On the other hand, if the third condition is not satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 does not transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第3の条件が成立した場合(即ち、歪み量が比較的大きい場合)に、第1の装置810は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820にフィードバックする。第1の装置810は、第2の装置820からの第1の指示信号なしに、適切な状況において伝送関連情報を第2の装置820にフィードバックできる。 The above configuration has the following effects. The first device 810 feeds back the transmission-related information to the second device 820 when the third condition is met (ie, when the amount of distortion is relatively large). The first device 810 can feed back transmission-related information to the second device 820 in appropriate circumstances without a first indication signal from the second device 820 .
 なお、他の例において、第1の装置810が第2の信号を受信するたびに、情報送信部145は歪み量を推定してもよい。 In another example, the information transmitting section 145 may estimate the amount of distortion each time the first device 810 receives the second signal.
 (3)第3変形例
 図18に示した処理と図19に示した処理とが組み合わされてもよい。図21は、無線通信装置1700の処理の流れの一例を示すシーケンス図である。
(3) Third Modification The processing shown in FIG. 18 and the processing shown in FIG. 19 may be combined. FIG. 21 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the processing flow of wireless communication apparatus 1700. As shown in FIG.
 図21のステップ2101~ステップ2107と、図19のステップ1901~ステップ1907とは同じ処理である。従って、これらのステップの詳細な説明を省略する。情報送信部145は、周期Tpについての情報を含む第1の指示信号(2101)に応じて、周期Tpが経過するごとに、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。 Steps 2101 to 2107 in FIG. 21 and steps 1901 to 1907 in FIG. 19 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted. The information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 each time the period Tp elapses in response to the first instruction signal (2101) including information about the period Tp.
 第2の装置820が学習処理を実行するごとに、指示送信部114は、第1の条件が成立したか否かを判定する。 Every time the second device 820 executes the learning process, the instruction transmission unit 114 determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied.
 第2の装置820がステップ2107において学習処理を実行した後、指示送信部114は、第1の条件が成立したと判定する(2108)。指示送信部114は、回数Nkについての情報を含む第1の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2109)。 After the second device 820 executes the learning process in step 2107, the instruction transmission unit 114 determines that the first condition is satisfied (2108). The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal including information about the number of times Nk to the first device 810 (2109).
 図21のステップ2110~ステップ2117と、図18のステップ1807~ステップ1814とは同じ処理である。従って、これらのステップの詳細な説明を省略する。なお、ステップ2110~ステップ2117において、第1の装置810が伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する時間間隔は、周期Tpよりも小さい。 Steps 2110 to 2117 in FIG. 21 and steps 1807 to 1814 in FIG. 18 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted. In steps 2110 to 2117, the time interval at which the first device 810 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 is shorter than the period Tp.
 指示送信部114がステップ2117において第2の指示信号を送信した後、指示送信部114は、周期Tpについての情報を含む第1の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する。これに応じて、情報送信部145は、周期Tpが経過するごとに、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。 After the instruction transmitting section 114 transmits the second instruction signal in step 2117, the instruction transmitting section 114 transmits to the first device 810 a first instruction signal including information about the period Tp. In response, the information transmitting section 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 every time the cycle Tp elapses.
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の条件が成立した場合(即ち、近似誤差が大きい場合)に、第1の装置810は、比較的短い周期で、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へフィードバックする。第2の装置820は、伝送経路120の現在の状態を第1のNN300及び第2のNN600に早く反映させることができる。一方で、第2の条件が成立した場合(即ち、近似誤差が小さい場合)、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータ及び第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを更新する必要性が低い。このような状況において、第1の装置810は、比較的長い周期Tpで、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820にフィードバックする。第2の装置820における処理負荷を抑えることができる。 The above configuration has the following effects. When the first condition is met (that is, when the approximation error is large), the first device 810 feeds back the transmission-related information to the second device 820 at relatively short intervals. The second device 820 can quickly reflect the current state of the transmission path 120 to the first NN 300 and the second NN 600 . On the other hand, if the second condition is satisfied (that is, if the approximation error is small), the need to update the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 is low. Under such circumstances, the first device 810 feeds back transmission-related information to the second device 820 with a relatively long period Tp. The processing load on the second device 820 can be suppressed.
 (4)第4変形例
 図18に示した処理と図20に示した処理とが組み合わされてもよい。図22は、無線通信装置1700の処理の流れの一例を示すシーケンス図である。
(4) Fourth Modification The processing shown in FIG. 18 and the processing shown in FIG. 20 may be combined. FIG. 22 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the processing flow of wireless communication apparatus 1700. As shown in FIG.
 図22のステップ2201~ステップ2205と、図20のステップ2001~ステップ2005とは同じ処理である。従って、これらのステップの詳細な説明を省略する。 Steps 2201 to 2205 in FIG. 22 and steps 2001 to 2005 in FIG. 20 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted.
 第2の装置820が学習処理を実行するごとに、指示送信部114は、第1の条件が成立したか否かを判定する。 Every time the second device 820 executes the learning process, the instruction transmission unit 114 determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied.
 第2の装置820がステップ2205において学習処理を実行した後、指示送信部114は、第1の条件が成立したと判定する(2206)。指示送信部114は、回数Nkについての情報を含む第1の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2207)。 After the second device 820 executes the learning process in step 2205, the instruction transmission unit 114 determines that the first condition is satisfied (2206). The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal including information about the number of times Nk to the first device 810 (2207).
 図22のステップ2208~ステップ2215と、図18のステップ1807~ステップ1814とは同じ処理である。従って、これらのステップの詳細な説明を省略する。ステップ2208~ステップ2215において、第2の装置820が第2の信号を第1の装置810へと送信するたびに、第1の装置810が伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。従って、第1の装置810が伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する時間間隔は、比較的短い。 Steps 2208 to 2215 in FIG. 22 and steps 1807 to 1814 in FIG. 18 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted. In steps 2208-2215, the first device 810 sends transmission-related information to the second device 820 each time the second device 820 sends a second signal to the first device 810. FIG. Therefore, the time interval for the first device 810 to send the transmission-related information to the second device 820 is relatively short.
 指示送信部114がステップ2215において第2の指示信号を送信した後、デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2216)。情報送信部145は、上述のように歪み量を推定し、第3の条件が成立するか否かを判定する(2217)。 After the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits the second instruction signal in step 2215, the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2216). The information transmitting unit 145 estimates the distortion amount as described above, and determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied (2217).
 第1の装置810が第2の信号を受信するたびに、情報送信部145は歪み量を推定して、第3の条件が成立するか否かを判定する。第3の条件が成立した場合、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。この場合、上述のように、指示送信部114は、第1の条件が成立するか否かを判定する。 Every time the first device 810 receives the second signal, the information transmitting section 145 estimates the amount of distortion and determines whether the third condition is satisfied. If the third condition is satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission related information to the second device 820 . In this case, as described above, the instruction transmission unit 114 determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied.
 これに対し、第3の条件が成立しない場合、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信しない。 On the other hand, if the third condition is not satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 does not transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の段階において、第3の条件が成立した場合(即ち、歪み量が比較的大きい場合)にのみ、第1の装置810は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820にフィードバックする。第2の装置820は、第1の装置810が伝送関連情報をフィードバックしたときのみ、学習処理を実行し、且つ、第1の条件が成立するか否かを判定する。第2の装置820における処理負荷を抑えることができる。 The above configuration has the following effects. In the first stage, the first device 810 feeds back transmission-related information to the second device 820 only when the third condition is met (ie, when the amount of distortion is relatively large). The second device 820 performs learning processing and determines whether the first condition is satisfied only when the first device 810 feeds back the transmission-related information. The processing load on the second device 820 can be suppressed.
 次に、第2の段階において、第1の条件が成立した場合(即ち、近似誤差が大きい場合)に、第2の装置820は、比較的短い周期で伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へフィードバックするように、第1の装置810に対して指示する。第2の段階では、第2の装置820は、比較的短い周期で、伝送経路120の現在の状態(特に、伝送歪みに関する情報)を第1のNN300及び第2のNN600に反映させることができる。 Next, in the second stage, when the first condition is satisfied (that is, when the approximation error is large), the second device 820 sends the transmission-related information to the second device 820 at relatively short intervals. Instruct the first device 810 to feed back. In the second stage, the second device 820 can reflect the current state of the transmission path 120 (in particular, information on transmission distortion) to the first NN 300 and the second NN 600 in a relatively short cycle. .
 (5)第5変形例
 第1の装置810と第2の装置820との間は1つの通信経路(例えば、1つの光ファイバ)によって接続されてもよい。第2の信号の送信が光ファイバを介して行われ、伝送関連情報の送信が同じ光ファイバを介して行われてもよい。
(5) Fifth Modification The first device 810 and the second device 820 may be connected by one communication path (for example, one optical fiber). Transmission of the second signal may occur over an optical fiber and transmission of the transmission-related information may occur over the same optical fiber.
 例えば、第1の装置810及び第2の装置820は、光波長多重通信の方式を用いて互いに通信するように構成されてもよい。光波長多重通信は、公知の技術であり、複数の異なる波長の光信号を1つの光ファイバ上で送信する方式である。 For example, the first device 810 and the second device 820 may be configured to communicate with each other using an optical wavelength division multiplexing scheme. Optical wavelength division multiplexing is a well-known technology, and is a method of transmitting optical signals with different wavelengths over one optical fiber.
 第1の装置810及び第2の装置820は、偏波多重通信の方式を用いて互いに通信するように構成されてもよい。偏波多重通信は、公知の技術であり、水平方向に振動する水平偏波と垂直方向の垂直偏波とを1つの光ファイバ上で送信する方式である。 The first device 810 and the second device 820 may be configured to communicate with each other using a polarization multiplexing scheme. Polarization multiplexing is a well-known technique, and is a method of transmitting horizontally polarized waves vibrating in the horizontal direction and vertically polarized waves in the vertical direction over one optical fiber.
 第1の装置810及び第2の装置820は、時間多重通信の方式を用いて互いに通信するように構成されてもよい。時間多重通信は、公知の技術であり、複数の信号が時間軸上で重ならないように複数の信号を1つの光ファイバ上で順番に送信する方式である。 The first device 810 and the second device 820 may be configured to communicate with each other using a method of time multiplexing. Time-multiplexed communication is a well-known technology, and is a method of sequentially transmitting a plurality of signals over one optical fiber so that the signals do not overlap on the time axis.
 光ファイバは、複数のコアを有するマルチコアファイバであってもよい。この場合、第1の装置810及び第2の装置820は、空間多重通信の方式を用いて互いに通信するように構成されてもよい。空間多重通信は、公知の技術であり、コアごとに異なる信号を送信する方式である。 The optical fiber may be a multi-core fiber having multiple cores. In this case, the first device 810 and the second device 820 may be configured to communicate with each other using a scheme of spatial multiplexing. Spatial multiplex communication is a well-known technology, and is a method of transmitting different signals for each core.
 (6)第6変形例
 図23は、無線通信装置2300の構成を示す図である。無線通信装置2300は、第1の装置810と、第2の装置820とを備える。無線通信装置2300は、N種類の信号を出力するための構成を有する。ここで、Nは、2以上の整数である。
(6) Sixth Modification FIG. Wireless communication device 2300 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 . Radio communication apparatus 2300 has a configuration for outputting N types of signals. Here, N is an integer of 2 or more.
 具体的には、第1の装置810は、複数のアンテナ141-1~141-Nと、複数のBPF142-1~142-Nと、複数の増幅器143-1~143-Nとを備える。 Specifically, the first device 810 includes multiple antennas 141-1 to 141-N, multiple BPFs 142-1 to 142-N, and multiple amplifiers 143-1 to 143-N.
 第2の装置820は、複数のデルタシグマ変調部111-1~111-Nを備える。更に、第1の装置810と第2の装置820は、複数の第1の通信経路131-1~131-Nを介して接続されている。複数のデルタシグマ変調部111-1~111-Nは、それぞれ、複数の第1の通信経路131-1~131-Nを介して複数のアンテナ141-1~141-Nに接続されている。例えば、デルタシグマ変調部111-Nは、第1の通信経路131-N、BPF142-N及び増幅器143-Nを介して、アンテナ141-Nに接続されている。 The second device 820 comprises a plurality of delta-sigma modulating sections 111-1 to 111-N. Furthermore, the first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via a plurality of first communication paths 131-1 to 131-N. A plurality of delta-sigma modulation sections 111-1 to 111-N are connected to a plurality of antennas 141-1 to 141-N via a plurality of first communication paths 131-1 to 131-N, respectively. For example, delta-sigma modulator 111-N is connected to antenna 141-N via first communication path 131-N, BPF 142-N and amplifier 143-N.
 第1の装置810は、スイッチ146を備える。スイッチ146は、変調部144へ出力する信号を切り替えることができる。この構成によれば、第1の装置810は、N種類の第2の信号のそれぞれについて、伝送関連情報(この例では、第3の信号)を第2の装置820へフィードバックすることができる。これにより、N種類の第2の信号のそれぞれの伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みを抑えることができる。 The first device 810 has a switch 146 . The switch 146 can switch the signal to be output to the modulating section 144 . According to this configuration, the first device 810 can feed back transmission-related information (the third signal in this example) to the second device 820 for each of the N types of second signals. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the transmission distortion that occurs in the transmission process of each of the N kinds of second signals.
 (7)第7変形例
 図24は、無線通信装置2400の構成を示す図である。無線通信装置2400は、第1の装置810と、第2の装置820とを備える。無線通信装置2400は、送信機能及び受信機能を備える。
(7) Seventh Modification FIG. Wireless communication device 2400 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 . Wireless communication device 2400 has a transmission function and a reception function.
 以降において、信号が第2の装置820から第1の装置810を介して端末装置190まで送信されるリンクは、「下りリンク」と称呼される場合がある。下りリンク上を送信される信号は、「下りリンク信号」と称呼される場合がある。 Hereinafter, the link in which signals are transmitted from the second device 820 to the terminal device 190 via the first device 810 may be referred to as a "downlink". Signals transmitted on the downlink are sometimes referred to as "downlink signals."
 一方、信号が端末装置190から第1の装置810を介して第2の装置820まで送信されるリンクは、「上りリンク」と称呼される場合がある。上りリンク上を送信される信号は、「上りリンク信号」と称呼される場合がある。 On the other hand, the link in which signals are transmitted from the terminal device 190 through the first device 810 to the second device 820 is sometimes called "uplink". Signals transmitted on the uplink are sometimes referred to as "uplink signals."
 第2の装置820は、第1の通信経路131を介して下りリンク信号を第1の装置810へ送信する。第1の装置810は、第2の通信経路132を介して上りリンク信号を第2の装置820へ送信する。 The second device 820 transmits downlink signals to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 . First device 810 transmits uplink signals to second device 820 over second communication path 132 .
 第1の装置810は、アンテナスイッチ147を備える。アンテナスイッチ147は、増幅器143に接続された第1端子147aと、アンテナ141に接続された第2端子147bと、低ノイズ増幅器(Low Noise Amplifier:LNA)148に接続された第3端子147cとを備える。 The first device 810 has an antenna switch 147 . The antenna switch 147 has a first terminal 147a connected to the amplifier 143, a second terminal 147b connected to the antenna 141, and a third terminal 147c connected to a low noise amplifier (LNA) 148. Prepare.
 アンテナスイッチ147は、送信モード、受信モード及びフィードバックモードの3種類のモードで動作することができる。 The antenna switch 147 can operate in three modes: transmission mode, reception mode and feedback mode.
 送信モードの場合、第1端子147aと第2端子147bとが接続される。従って、下りリンク信号がアンテナ141から出力される。 In the transmission mode, the first terminal 147a and the second terminal 147b are connected. Therefore, a downlink signal is output from the antenna 141 .
 受信モードの場合、第2端子147bと第3端子147cとが接続される。従って、上りリンク信号が、LNA148、変調部144、情報送信部145及び第2の通信経路132を介して第2の装置820に送信される。第2の装置820は、図示しない受信機能を用いて、上りリンク信号に対して所定の処理を実行する。 In the case of the reception mode, the second terminal 147b and the third terminal 147c are connected. Accordingly, an uplink signal is transmitted to the second device 820 via the LNA 148 , the modulator 144 , the information transmitter 145 and the second communication path 132 . The second device 820 uses a reception function (not shown) to perform predetermined processing on the uplink signal.
 フィードバックモードの場合、第1端子147aと第3端子147cとが接続される。従って、下りリンク信号が、LNA148及び変調部144を介して情報送信部145に送られる。情報送信部145は、所定のタイミングで、第2の通信経路132を介して、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。本例の伝送関連情報は、第1の装置810から端末装置190へと送信されるべき下りリンク信号に関する情報である。具体的には、伝送関連情報は、下りリンク信号を変調部144を通して周波数変換(ダウンコンバート)することにより得られた信号(即ち、第3の信号)である。 In the feedback mode, the first terminal 147a and the third terminal 147c are connected. Therefore, the downlink signal is sent to the information transmission section 145 via the LNA 148 and modulation section 144 . The information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 at a predetermined timing. The transmission-related information in this example is information about downlink signals to be transmitted from the first device 810 to the terminal device 190 . Specifically, the transmission-related information is a signal (that is, a third signal) obtained by frequency-converting (down-converting) the downlink signal through the modulation section 144 .
 このような構成において、無線通信装置2400は、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex:TDD)方式を用いて、下りリンク信号を送信し、上りリンク信号を受信してもよい。TDDは、上りリンク信号と下りリンク信号を異なるスロットで交互に送信する方式である。なお、上記のスロットは、「タイムスロット」と称呼される場合もある。 In such a configuration, the radio communication apparatus 2400 may transmit downlink signals and receive uplink signals using a Time Division Duplex (TDD) scheme. TDD is a scheme in which uplink signals and downlink signals are alternately transmitted in different slots. Note that the above slots may also be referred to as "time slots".
 無線通信装置2400がTDD方式で動作する場合、指示送信部114は以下のように動作する。上りリンクのスロットの場合、第2の通信経路132は上りリンク信号の送信のために使用されているが、第1の通信経路131は使用されていない。従って、指示送信部114は、上りリンクのスロットにおいて、第1の指示信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する。指示送信部114は、上りリンクのスロットにおいて、第2の指示信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する。 When wireless communication device 2400 operates in the TDD scheme, instruction transmission section 114 operates as follows. For uplink slots, the second communication path 132 is used for transmission of uplink signals, while the first communication path 131 is not used. Therefore, the instruction transmitter 114 transmits the first instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 in the uplink slot. The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a second instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 in an uplink slot.
 更に、情報送信部145は、以下のように動作する。下りリンクのスロットの場合、第1の通信経路131は下りリンク信号の送信のために使用されているが、第2の通信経路132は使用されていない。従って、情報送信部145は、下りリンクのスロットにおいて、伝送関連情報を第2の通信経路132を介して第2の装置820へ送信する。 Furthermore, the information transmission unit 145 operates as follows. For downlink slots, the first communication path 131 is used for transmission of downlink signals, while the second communication path 132 is not used. Therefore, the information transmitter 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 in the downlink slot.
 <<4.第3実施形態>>
 続いて、図25を参照して、第3実施形態を説明する。なお、第3実施形態について、第1及び第2実施形態と同じ構成要素には同じ符号を付し、それらの構成要素の詳細な説明を省略する。
<<4. Third Embodiment>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a third embodiment will be described. In addition, about 3rd Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same component as 1st and 2nd Embodiment, and detailed description of those components is abbreviate|omitted.
 <4-1.無線通信装置の概略構成>
 図25は、無線通信装置2500の構成を示す図である。無線通信装置2500は、第1の装置810と、第2の装置820とを備える。第1の装置810と第2の装置820とは、第1の通信経路131を介して接続されている。
<4-1. Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the configuration of wireless communication apparatus 2500. As shown in FIG. Wireless communication device 2500 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 . The first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the first communication path 131 .
 <4-2.第1の装置の構成>
 第1の装置810は、アンテナ141と、BPF142と、増幅器143と、アンテナ150と、周波数変換部151と、第2の変調部152と、第3の変調部153を備える。第3の変調部153は、変調部144と同じ構成を有する。第3の変調部153は、増幅器143によって増幅されたアナログ信号(下りリンク信号に相当)を上述のように処理し、第3の信号(I信号及びQ信号を含む)を出力する。
<4-2. Configuration of the first device>
A first device 810 includes an antenna 141 , a BPF 142 , an amplifier 143 , an antenna 150 , a frequency conversion section 151 , a second modulation section 152 and a third modulation section 153 . Third modulating section 153 has the same configuration as modulating section 144 . The third modulation section 153 processes the analog signal (corresponding to the downlink signal) amplified by the amplifier 143 as described above, and outputs the third signal (including the I signal and the Q signal).
 第2の変調部152は、第3の変調部153の出力を受け取る。第2の変調部152は、第3の変調部153の出力に対して信号変調処理を実行する。信号変調処理として、一般的な変調方式が使用されてよい。例えば、信号変調処理として、シングルキャリア変調又はOFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)等が使用されてよい。周波数変換部151は、第2の変調部152の出力を受け取る。周波数変換部151は、第2の変調部152の出力をアップコンバートする。この場合、周波数変換部151は、第2の変調部152の出力を、周波数f0とは異なる周波数f1へアップコンバートする。周波数変換部151の出力は、アンテナ150を介して送信される。 The second modulating section 152 receives the output of the third modulating section 153 . The second modulating section 152 performs signal modulation processing on the output of the third modulating section 153 . A general modulation scheme may be used as the signal modulation process. For example, signal modulation processing may be single carrier modulation or OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing). The frequency conversion section 151 receives the output of the second modulation section 152 . The frequency conversion section 151 up-converts the output of the second modulation section 152 . In this case, frequency conversion section 151 up-converts the output of second modulation section 152 to frequency f1 different from frequency f0. The output of frequency converter 151 is transmitted via antenna 150 .
 <4-3.第2の装置の構成>
 第2の装置820は、デルタシグマ変調部111と、NN処理部112と、NN学習部113と、アンテナ115と、復調部117と、変調部144とを備える。第2の装置820は、アンテナ115を介して、第1の装置810のアンテナ150から出力された信号を受信する。変調部144は、当該受信された信号を上述のように処理する。復調部117は、変調部144の出力を復調する。なお、復調部117の復調方式は、第2の変調部152の変調方式に対応する方式である。復調部117は、復調された第3の信号(I信号及びQ信号を含む)をNN学習部113に出力する。
<4-3. Configuration of the second device>
Second device 820 includes delta-sigma modulation section 111 , NN processing section 112 , NN learning section 113 , antenna 115 , demodulation section 117 and modulation section 144 . The second device 820 receives the signal output from the antenna 150 of the first device 810 via the antenna 115 . Modulator 144 processes the received signal as described above. Demodulator 117 demodulates the output of modulator 144 . The demodulation method of demodulator 117 is a method corresponding to the modulation method of second modulator 152 . Demodulator 117 outputs the demodulated third signal (including the I signal and Q signal) to NN learning section 113 .
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の装置810は、空間伝送を介して伝送関連情報を第2の装置820にフィードバックできる。本例の伝送関連情報は、第1の装置810から端末装置190へと送信されるべき下りリンク信号に関する情報である。従って、第2の装置820は、伝送関連情報を用いて第1のNN300の第1のパラメータ及び第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを更新できる。これにより、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みを抑えることができる。 The above configuration has the following effects. The first device 810 can feed back transmission-related information to the second device 820 via spatial transmission. The transmission-related information in this example is information about downlink signals to be transmitted from the first device 810 to the terminal device 190 . Therefore, the second device 820 can update the first parameter of the first NN 300 and the second parameter of the second NN 600 using the transmission related information. As a result, transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal can be suppressed.
 <<5.第4実施形態>>
 続いて、図26~図32を参照して、第4実施形態及びその変形例を説明する。なお、第4実施形態について、第1~第3実施形態と同じ構成要素には同じ符号を付し、それらの構成要素の詳細な説明を省略する。
<<5. Fourth Embodiment>>
Next, a fourth embodiment and its modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 32. FIG. In addition, regarding the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same constituent elements as those of the first to third embodiments, and detailed descriptions of those constituent elements are omitted.
 <5-1.無線通信装置の概略構成>
 図26は、無線通信装置2600の構成を示す図である。無線通信装置2600は、第1の装置810と、第2の装置820とを備える。第1の装置810と第2の装置820とは、第1の通信経路131を介して接続されている。更に、第1の装置810と第2の装置820とは、第2の通信経路132を介して接続されている。
<5-1. Schematic Configuration of Wireless Communication Device>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the configuration of wireless communication apparatus 2600. As shown in FIG. Wireless communication device 2600 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 . The first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the first communication path 131 . Further, the first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the second communication path 132 .
 <5-2.第1の装置の構成>
 第1の装置810は、アンテナ141と、BPF142と、増幅器143と、変調部144と、情報送信部145と、デジタル復元部149と、NN学習部113とを備える。
<5-2. Configuration of the first device>
First device 810 includes antenna 141 , BPF 142 , amplifier 143 , modulation section 144 , information transmission section 145 , digital restoration section 149 , and NN learning section 113 .
 デジタル復元部149は、第1の通信経路131の出力を受け取る。デジタル復元部149は、第1の通信経路131の出力を1ビットのデジタル信号に変換する。このとき、第1の通信経路131の出力に含まれる伝送歪みが整形されてデジタル信号が出力される。これにより、デルタシグマ変調部111によって出力された元の第2の信号が復元される。このように、デジタル復元部149は、第3の信号(この例では、第2の信号が第1の通信経路131を通過する過程を経て生成された信号)から、第2の信号の復元信号を生成する。以降において、このような第2の信号の復元信号は、「第5の信号」と称呼される場合がある。 The digital restoration unit 149 receives the output of the first communication path 131 . The digital restoration unit 149 converts the output of the first communication path 131 into a 1-bit digital signal. At this time, the transmission distortion included in the output of the first communication path 131 is shaped and a digital signal is output. Thereby, the original second signal output by the delta-sigma modulation section 111 is restored. In this way, the digital restoration unit 149 converts the restored signal of the second signal from the third signal (in this example, the signal generated through the process in which the second signal passes through the first communication path 131). to generate Hereinafter, such a restored signal of the second signal may be referred to as a "fifth signal".
 NN学習部113は、第5の信号(復元された第2の信号)と、変調部144によって出力された第3の信号(即ち、第2の信号が、第1の通信経路131、BPF142、増幅器143及び変調部144を通過する過程を経て生成された第3の信号)とを用いて、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータ及び第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを計算する。NN学習部113は、第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを、当該計算された第2のパラメータに更新する。更に、NN学習部113は、当該計算された第1のパラメータを情報送信部145に出力する。情報送信部145は、第1のパラメータを、第2の通信経路132を介して第2の装置820へ送信する。従って、本例の伝送関連情報は、第1のパラメータである。第1のパラメータは、第1のNN300において、第2の信号の伝送過程において生成される信号の近似値を出力するために使用される情報である。従って、第1のパラメータは、第1の装置810と第2の装置820との間の伝送に関する情報である。更に、他の言い方をすれば、第1のパラメータは、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みの近似値を出力するためにも使用されるので、第1のパラメータは、伝送歪みに関する情報であると言うこともできる。 The NN learning unit 113 receives the fifth signal (restored second signal) and the third signal output by the modulation unit 144 (that is, the second signal is the first communication path 131, the BPF 142, A first parameter of the first NN 300 and a second parameter of the second NN 600 are calculated using the third signal generated through the process of passing through the amplifier 143 and the modulator 144 . The NN learning unit 113 updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 to the calculated second parameter. Further, NN learning section 113 outputs the calculated first parameter to information transmitting section 145 . Information transmitter 145 transmits the first parameter to second device 820 via second communication path 132 . Therefore, the transmission-related information in this example is the first parameter. The first parameter is information used in the first NN 300 to output an approximation of the signal generated in the process of transmitting the second signal. The first parameter is therefore information about the transmission between the first device 810 and the second device 820 . Furthermore, to put it another way, the first parameter is also used to output an approximation of the transmission distortion that occurs during the transmission process of the second signal, so that the first parameter is information about the transmission distortion. It can also be said that
 <5-3.第2の装置の構成>
 第2の装置820は、デルタシグマ変調部111と、NN処理部112と、指示送信部114とを備える。デルタシグマ変調部111は、第1の通信経路131を介して第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信する。指示送信部114は、第1の指示信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する。指示送信部114は、第2の指示信号を、第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する。NN処理部112は、第2の通信経路132を介して第1のパラメータを受信する。NN処理部112は、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを、当該受信した第1のパラメータに更新する。
<5-3. Configuration of the second device>
The second device 820 comprises a delta-sigma modulation section 111 , an NN processing section 112 and an instruction transmission section 114 . Delta-sigma modulator 111 transmits the second signal to first device 810 via first communication path 131 . Instruction transmitting unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to first device 810 via first communication path 131 . Instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a second instruction signal to first device 810 via first communication path 131 . NN processing unit 112 receives the first parameter via second communication path 132 . The NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter.
 <5-4.無線通信装置の処理の流れ>
 次に、図27を参照して、無線通信装置2600の処理の流れを説明する。図27は、無線通信装置2600の処理の流れの一例を示すシーケンス図である。
<5-4. Flow of Processing of Wireless Communication Device>
Next, referring to FIG. 27, the processing flow of wireless communication device 2600 will be described. FIG. 27 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 2600. As shown in FIG.
 無線通信装置2600が起動される(又は無線通信装置2600がリセットされる)と、指示送信部114は、第1の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2701)。本例において、第1の指示信号は、回数Nkについての情報を含む。 When the wireless communication device 2600 is activated (or the wireless communication device 2600 is reset), the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to the first device 810 (2701). In this example, the first indication signal contains information about the number of times Nk.
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2702)。NN学習部113は、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する(2703)。NN学習部113は、第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを、当該計算された第2のパラメータに更新する。 The delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2702). The NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2703). The NN learning unit 113 updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 to the calculated second parameter.
 情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報(本例では、第1のパラメータ)を第2の装置820へ送信する(2704)。これは、第1の装置810が第1の指示信号を受信した時点を基準として、1回目の伝送関連情報の送信である。第2の装置820が伝送関連情報を受信する。NN処理部112は、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを、当該受信した第1のパラメータに更新する。 The information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information (in this example, the first parameter) to the second device 820 (2704). This is the first transmission of the transmission-related information from the time when the first device 810 received the first instruction signal. A second device 820 receives the transmission related information. The NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter.
 なお、NN学習部113が第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算するごとに、情報送信部145は、第2の条件が成立するか否かを判定する。 It should be noted that each time the NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter, the information transmitting unit 145 determines whether the second condition is satisfied.
 その後、第2の信号の送信、第1及び第2のパラメータの計算処理、並びに、伝送関連情報の送信が、繰り返し実行される。これにより、近似誤差が徐々に小さくなる。 After that, transmission of the second signal, calculation processing of the first and second parameters, and transmission of transmission-related information are repeatedly executed. This gradually reduces the approximation error.
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2705)。NN学習部113は、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する(2706)。 The delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2705). The NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2706).
 情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する(2707)。これは、第1の装置810が第1の指示信号を受信した時点を基準として、Nj回目の伝送関連情報の送信である。なお、Nj<Nkである。 The information transmission unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 (2707). This is the Nj-th transmission of the transmission-related information from when the first device 810 received the first instruction signal. Note that Nj<Nk.
 この時点にて、情報送信部145は、第2の条件が成立すると判定する(2708)。情報送信部145は、通知を第2の装置820へ送信する(2709)。この通知は、第2の条件が成立したことを第2の装置820に知らせるための通知である。この通知に応じて、指示送信部114は、第2の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2710)。これにより、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報の送信を停止する。 At this point, the information transmission unit 145 determines that the second condition is satisfied (2708). The information transmission unit 145 transmits the notification to the second device 820 (2709). This notification is for notifying the second device 820 that the second condition has been met. In response to this notification, instruction transmitting section 114 transmits a second instruction signal to first device 810 (2710). As a result, the information transmitting unit 145 stops transmitting transmission-related information.
 その後、指示送信部114は、待ち時間Twが経過すると、回数Nkについての情報を含む第1の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2711)。 After that, when the waiting time Tw elapses, the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal including information about the number of times Nk to the first device 810 (2711).
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の装置810は、第2の条件が成立するまで、伝送関連情報(第1のパラメータ)を第2の装置820に繰り返しフィードバックする。第2の装置820は、伝送関連情報を用いて第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを更新できる。これにより、第2の信号の伝送過程において生じる伝送歪みを抑えることができる。更に、同時接続数及び伝送容量を増大させる分散MIMOシステムを実現できる。 The above configuration has the following effects. The first device 810 repeatedly feeds back the transmission-related information (first parameter) to the second device 820 until the second condition is met. The second device 820 can update the first parameter of the first NN 300 with the transmission related information. As a result, transmission distortion that occurs in the process of transmitting the second signal can be suppressed. Furthermore, a distributed MIMO system can be implemented that increases the number of simultaneous connections and transmission capacity.
 <5-5.変形例>
 本開示に係る技術は、上述した実施形態には限定されない。
<5-5. Variation>
The technology according to the present disclosure is not limited to the above-described embodiments.
 (1)第1変形例
 図28は、無線通信装置2600の処理の流れの一例を示すシーケンス図である。
(1) First Modification FIG. 28 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 2600. In FIG.
 無線通信装置2600が起動される(又は無線通信装置2600がリセットされる)と、指示送信部114は、第1の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2801)。第1の信号は、周期Tpついての情報を含む。周期Tpは、上述したように、学習期間によって定義されてもよい。更に、周期Tpは、上述したように、フレーム、サブフレーム又はスロットによって定義されてもよい。 When the wireless communication device 2600 is activated (or the wireless communication device 2600 is reset), the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to the first device 810 (2801). The first signal contains information about the period Tp. The period Tp may be defined by the learning period, as described above. Furthermore, the period Tp may be defined by frames, subframes or slots as described above.
 デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2802)。NN学習部113は、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する(2803)。NN学習部113は、第2のNN600の第2のパラメータを、当該計算された第2のパラメータに更新する。 The delta-sigma modulation unit 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2802). The NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2803). The NN learning unit 113 updates the second parameter of the second NN 600 to the calculated second parameter.
 情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報(本例では、第1のパラメータ)を第2の装置820へ送信する(2804)。第2の装置820が伝送関連情報を受信する。NN処理部112は、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを、当該受信した第1のパラメータに更新する。 The information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information (in this example, the first parameter) to the second device 820 (2804). A second device 820 receives the transmission related information. The NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter.
 その後、デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ繰り返し送信する(2805)。 After that, the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 repeatedly transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2805).
 NN学習部113がステップ2803の処理を実行した時点から周期Tpが経過する。NN学習部113は、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する(2806)。情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する(2807)。 A cycle Tp has passed since the NN learning unit 113 executed the process of step 2803 . The NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2806). The information transmitting unit 145 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 820 (2807).
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の装置810は、周期的に、伝送関連情報(第1のパラメータ)を第2の装置820にフィードバックする。第2の装置820は、伝送関連情報を用いて第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを周期的に更新できる。 The above configuration has the following effects. The first device 810 periodically feeds back transmission related information (first parameter) to the second device 820 . The second device 820 can periodically update the first parameter of the first NN 300 with the transmission related information.
 なお、第1の装置810が第2の信号を受信するごとに、NN学習部113は、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算してもよい。情報送信部145は、周期Tpが経過するごとに、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信してよい。 Note that the NN learning unit 113 may calculate the first parameter and the second parameter each time the first device 810 receives the second signal. The information transmitting section 145 may transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 every time the cycle Tp elapses.
 (2)第2変形例
 図29は、無線通信装置2600の処理の流れの一例を示すシーケンス図である。
(2) Second Modification FIG. 29 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication device 2600 .
 無線通信装置2600が起動される(又は無線通信装置2600がリセットされる)と、デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(2901)。NN学習部113は、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する(2902)。NN学習部113は、近似誤差を情報送信部145に出力する。情報送信部145は、近似誤差を用いて、第1の条件が成立するか否かを判定する。本例において、情報送信部145は、第1の条件が成立したと判定する(2903)。この場合、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報(本例では、第1のパラメータ)を第2の装置820へ送信する(2904)。 When the wireless communication device 2600 is activated (or the wireless communication device 2600 is reset), the delta-sigma modulation section 111 transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2901). The NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2902). NN learning section 113 outputs the approximation error to information transmitting section 145 . The information transmitter 145 uses the approximation error to determine whether the first condition is satisfied. In this example, the information transmitting section 145 determines that the first condition is satisfied (2903). In this case, the information transmitting section 145 transmits the transmission-related information (the first parameter in this example) to the second device 820 (2904).
 その後、デルタシグマ変調部111は、第2の信号を第1の装置810へ繰り返し送信する(2905)。NN学習部113が第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する(2906)。そして、NN学習部113が第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算するたびに、情報送信部145は、第1の条件が成立するか否かを判定する。第1の条件が成立した場合、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。一方、第1の条件が成立しない場合、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信しない。 After that, the delta-sigma modulation unit 111 repeatedly transmits the second signal to the first device 810 (2905). The NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter (2906). Each time the NN learning unit 113 calculates the first parameter and the second parameter, the information transmitting unit 145 determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. If the first condition is satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission related information to the second device 820 . On the other hand, if the first condition is not satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 does not transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 .
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の条件が成立した場合(即ち、近似誤差が大きい場合)に、第1の装置810は、伝送関連情報(第1のパラメータ)を第2の装置820へ送信できる。 The above configuration has the following effects. The first device 810 can send the transmission-related information (the first parameter) to the second device 820 when the first condition is satisfied (ie, the approximation error is large).
 (3)第3変形例
 図27に示した処理と図28に示した処理とが組み合わされてもよい。図30は、無線通信装置2600の処理の流れの一例を示すシーケンス図である。
(3) Third Modification The processing shown in FIG. 27 and the processing shown in FIG. 28 may be combined. FIG. 30 is a sequence diagram showing an example of the flow of processing by wireless communication apparatus 2600. As shown in FIG.
 図30のステップ3001~ステップ3009と、図27のステップ2701~ステップ2709とは同じ処理である。従って、これらのステップの詳細な説明を省略する。なお、ステップ3001~ステップ3009において、第1の装置810が伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する時間間隔は、周期Tpよりも小さい。 Steps 3001 to 3009 in FIG. 30 and steps 2701 to 2709 in FIG. 27 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted. In steps 3001 to 3009, the time interval at which the first device 810 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 is shorter than the period Tp.
 指示送信部114がステップ3009において通知を受信すると、指示送信部114は、周期Tpを含む第1の指示信号を第1の装置810へ送信する(3010)。図30のステップ3011~ステップ3016と、図28のステップ2802~ステップ2807とは同じ処理である。従って、これらのステップの詳細な説明を省略する。 When the instruction transmission unit 114 receives the notification in step 3009, the instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal including the period Tp to the first device 810 (3010). Steps 3011 to 3016 in FIG. 30 and steps 2802 to 2807 in FIG. 28 are the same processing. Therefore, a detailed description of these steps is omitted.
 上記の構成は以下の効果を奏する。第1の装置810は、まず、比較的短い周期で、伝送関連情報(第1のパラメータ)を第2の装置820へ送信する。第2の装置820は、伝送経路120の状態を第1のNN300に早く反映させることができる。一方で、第2の条件が成立した場合(即ち、近似誤差が小さい場合)、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを更新する必要性が低い。このような状況において、第1の装置810は、比較的長い周期Tpで、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820にフィードバックする。 The above configuration has the following effects. First device 810 first transmits transmission-related information (first parameter) to second device 820 in a relatively short cycle. The second device 820 can quickly reflect the state of the transmission path 120 to the first NN 300 . On the other hand, if the second condition is met (that is, if the approximation error is small), the necessity of updating the first parameter of the first NN 300 is low. Under such circumstances, the first device 810 feeds back transmission-related information to the second device 820 with a relatively long period Tp.
 なお、図29に示した処理が図30のシーケンスに組み合わされてもよい。例えば、周期Tpの途中で(即ち、ステップ3012とステップ3015の間で)、情報送信部145が、第1の条件が成立するか否かを判定してもよい。第1の条件が成立した場合、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信する。一方、第1の条件が成立しない場合、情報送信部145は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820へ送信しない。この構成によれば、周期Tpの途中でも、近似誤差が大きくなった場合には、第1の装置810は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置820にフィードバックできる。 Note that the processing shown in FIG. 29 may be combined with the sequence of FIG. For example, in the middle of cycle Tp (that is, between steps 3012 and 3015), information transmitting section 145 may determine whether or not the first condition is satisfied. If the first condition is satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 transmits transmission related information to the second device 820 . On the other hand, if the first condition is not satisfied, the information transmitting section 145 does not transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 820 . According to this configuration, the first device 810 can feed back transmission-related information to the second device 820 even in the middle of the cycle Tp when the approximation error becomes large.
 (4)第4変形例
 無線通信装置2600は、第2実施形態の第7変形例の構成を備えてもよい。即ち、無線通信装置2600は、TDD方式で動作してもよい。この構成において、指示送信部114は、以下のように動作する。指示送信部114は、上りリンクのスロットにおいて、第1の指示信号を第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する。指示送信部114は、上りリンクのスロットにおいて、第2の指示信号を第1の通信経路131を介して第1の装置810へ送信する。
(4) Fourth Modification The wireless communication device 2600 may have the configuration of the seventh modification of the second embodiment. That is, radio communication apparatus 2600 may operate in the TDD scheme. In this configuration, the instruction transmission unit 114 operates as follows. The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a first instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 in an uplink slot. The instruction transmission unit 114 transmits a second instruction signal to the first device 810 via the first communication path 131 in an uplink slot.
 更に、情報送信部145は、以下のように動作する。情報送信部145は、下りリンクのスロットにおいて、伝送関連情報を第2の通信経路132を介して第2の装置820へ送信する。 Furthermore, the information transmission unit 145 operates as follows. The information transmitting unit 145 transmits the transmission-related information to the second device 820 via the second communication path 132 in downlink slots.
 (5)第5変形例
 図31は、無線通信装置2601の構成を示す図である。無線通信装置2601の構成要素は、図26の無線通信装置2600の構成要素と同じである。
(5) Fifth Modified Example FIG. The components of wireless communication device 2601 are the same as those of wireless communication device 2600 in FIG.
 第1の通信経路131の出力がデジタル復元部149へ直接入力される。デジタル復元部149によって出力された第5の信号(復元された第2の信号)は、BPF142へ入力される。第5の信号は、BPF142、増幅器143及び変調部144を経て、NN学習部113へ入力される。従って、NN学習部113は、「第5の信号」と、「第5の信号が、BPF142、増幅器143及び変調部144を通過する過程を経て生成された第3の信号」とを用いて、第1のパラメータ及び第2のパラメータを計算する。 The output of the first communication path 131 is directly input to the digital restoration section 149 . A fifth signal (restored second signal) output by the digital reconstruction unit 149 is input to the BPF 142 . The fifth signal is input to NN learning section 113 via BPF 142 , amplifier 143 and modulation section 144 . Therefore, the NN learning unit 113 uses the "fifth signal" and the "third signal generated through the process in which the fifth signal passes through the BPF 142, the amplifier 143, and the modulation unit 144", A first parameter and a second parameter are calculated.
 なお、本例の第1の装置810及び第2の装置820は、図27~図30の何れかのシーケンスに従って動作してもよい。 Note that the first device 810 and the second device 820 of this example may operate according to any one of the sequences in FIGS. 27-30.
 (6)第6変形例
 図32は、無線通信装置3100の構成を示す図である。無線通信装置3100は、第1の装置810と、第2の装置820とを備える。第1の装置810と第2の装置820とは、第1の通信経路131を介して接続されている。
(6) Sixth Modification FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a configuration of wireless communication apparatus 3100. In FIG. Wireless communication device 3100 comprises a first device 810 and a second device 820 . The first device 810 and the second device 820 are connected via the first communication path 131 .
 第1の装置810は、アンテナ141と、BPF142と、増幅器143と、変調部144と、情報送信部145と、デジタル復元部149と、NN学習部113と、アンテナ150と、周波数変換部151と、第2の変調部152とを備える。 The first device 810 includes an antenna 141, a BPF 142, an amplifier 143, a modulation section 144, an information transmission section 145, a digital restoration section 149, an NN learning section 113, an antenna 150, and a frequency conversion section 151. , and a second modulation unit 152 .
 第2の装置820は、デルタシグマ変調部111と、NN処理部112と、指示送信部114と、アンテナ115と、変調部116と、復調部117とを備える。 The second device 820 includes a delta-sigma modulation section 111, an NN processing section 112, an instruction transmission section 114, an antenna 115, a modulation section 116, and a demodulation section 117.
 本例において、第1の装置810は、アンテナ150を介して伝送関連情報(第1のパラメータ)を第2の装置820へ送信する。第2の装置820は、アンテナ115を介して伝送関連情報を受信する。以下、第1の装置810の動作及び第2の装置820の動作について説明する。 In this example, the first device 810 transmits transmission-related information (first parameter) to the second device 820 via the antenna 150 . A second device 820 receives the transmission related information via the antenna 115 . The operation of the first device 810 and the operation of the second device 820 will be described below.
 第2の変調部152は、NN学習部113の出力(第1のパラメータ)を受け取る。第2の変調部152は、NN学習部113の出力に対して信号変調処理を実行する。信号変調処理として、一般的な変調方式が使用されてよい。例えば、信号変調処理として、シングルキャリア変調又はOFDM等が使用されてよい。周波数変換部151は、第2の変調部152の出力を受け取る。周波数変換部151は、第2の変調部152の出力をアップコンバートする。この場合、周波数変換部151は、第2の変調部152の出力を、周波数f0とは異なる周波数f1へアップコンバートする。情報送信部145は、周波数変換部151の出力を受け取る。情報送信部145は、アンテナ150を介して伝送関連情報を送信する。本例の伝送関連情報は、周波数変換部151の出力であり、第1のパラメータである。 The second modulation unit 152 receives the output (first parameter) of the NN learning unit 113. Second modulation section 152 performs signal modulation processing on the output of NN learning section 113 . A general modulation scheme may be used as the signal modulation process. For example, signal modulation processing such as single carrier modulation or OFDM may be used. The frequency conversion section 151 receives the output of the second modulation section 152 . The frequency conversion section 151 up-converts the output of the second modulation section 152 . In this case, frequency conversion section 151 up-converts the output of second modulation section 152 to frequency f1 different from frequency f0. Information transmitting section 145 receives the output of frequency converting section 151 . Information transmitter 145 transmits transmission-related information via antenna 150 . The transmission-related information in this example is the output of the frequency converter 151 and is the first parameter.
 第2の装置820は、アンテナ150から出力された信号を、アンテナ115を介して受信する。変調部116は、受信した信号をダウンコンバートして、I信号及びQ信号を出力する。復調部117は、I信号及びQ信号を元のデジタル値(第1のパラメータ)に復調する。なお、復調部117の復調方式は、第2の変調部152の変調方式に対応する方式である。 A second device 820 receives the signal output from the antenna 150 via the antenna 115 . The modulation section 116 down-converts the received signal and outputs the I signal and the Q signal. The demodulator 117 demodulates the I signal and the Q signal to their original digital values (first parameters). The demodulation method of demodulator 117 is a method corresponding to the modulation method of second modulator 152 .
 復調部117は、第1のパラメータをNN処理部112へ出力する。NN処理部112は、第1のパラメータを受信する。NN処理部112は、第1のNN300の第1のパラメータを、当該受信した第1のパラメータに更新する。 The demodulator 117 outputs the first parameter to the NN processor 112 . NN processing unit 112 receives the first parameter. The NN processing unit 112 updates the first parameter of the first NN 300 to the received first parameter.
 なお、第1の装置810及び第2の装置820は、図27~図30の何れかのシーケンスに従って動作してもよい。 It should be noted that the first device 810 and the second device 820 may operate according to any sequence shown in FIGS.
 <<6.第5実施形態>>
 続いて、図33~図37を参照して、第5実施形態を説明する。上述した第1実施形態~第4実施形態は、具体的な実施形態であるが、第5実施形態は、より一般化された実施形態である。
<<6. Fifth Embodiment >>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37. FIG. Although the first to fourth embodiments described above are specific embodiments, the fifth embodiment is a more generalized embodiment.
 <6-1.無線通信装置の構成>
 図33は、無線通信装置3200の構成を示す図である。無線通信装置3200は、第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置3210と、第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置3220とを備える。以降において、第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置3210は、「第1の装置3210」と称呼され、第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置3220は、「第2の装置3220」と称呼される。
<6-1. Configuration of Wireless Communication Device>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the configuration of wireless communication apparatus 3200. As shown in FIG. The wireless communication device 3200 comprises a first radio access network device 3210 and a second radio access network device 3220 . Hereinafter, the first radio access network device 3210 will be referred to as "first device 3210" and the second radio access network device 3220 will be referred to as "second device 3220".
 第1の装置3210は、第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う装置である。第2の装置3220は、第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う装置である。 The first device 3210 is a device that performs processing related to the first physical layer. The second device 3220 is a device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer.
 図34は、第1の装置3210の構成を示す図である。第1の装置3210は、取得部3211と、送信部3212とを備える。取得部3211は、第1の装置3210と第2の装置3220との間の伝送に関する情報を取得する。以降において、第1の装置3210と第2の装置3220との間の伝送に関する情報は、単に「伝送関連情報」と称呼される。送信部3212は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置3220へ送信する。 FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the configuration of the first device 3210. As shown in FIG. The first device 3210 comprises an acquisition section 3211 and a transmission section 3212 . Acquisition unit 3211 acquires information on transmission between first device 3210 and second device 3220 . Hereinafter, information about transmission between the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 is simply referred to as "transmission related information". The transmitter 3212 transmits the transmission related information to the second device 3220 .
 第1の装置3210の構成要素3211~3212は、1つ以上のプロセッサと、メモリとにより実装されてもよい。当該1つ以上のプロセッサは、例えば、CPU、MPU及びマイクロコントローラのうちの1つ以上を含んでよい。メモリは、揮発性メモリ及び不揮発性メモリを含んでもよい。メモリは、プログラムコード(インストラクション)を記憶していてもよい。1つ以上のプロセッサは、メモリに記憶されたプログラムコードを実行することにより、第1の装置3210の機能を実現してもよい。 The components 3211-3212 of the first device 3210 may be implemented with one or more processors and memory. The one or more processors may include, for example, one or more of a CPU, MPU and microcontroller. The memory may include volatile memory and non-volatile memory. The memory may store program code (instructions). One or more processors may implement the functionality of the first device 3210 by executing program code stored in memory.
 なお、第1の装置3210は、上記の第1の装置810と同じように動作してもよい。 Note that the first device 3210 may operate in the same manner as the first device 810 described above.
 図35は、第2の装置3220の構成を示す図である。第2の装置3220は、受信部3221と、処理部3222とを備える。受信部3221は、第1の装置3210から伝送関連情報を受信する。処理部3222は、伝送関連情報を用いて、第1の装置3210との通信に関する処理を行う。 FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of the second device 3220. As shown in FIG. The second device 3220 comprises a receiver 3221 and a processor 3222 . The receiver 3221 receives transmission-related information from the first device 3210 . The processing unit 3222 performs processing related to communication with the first device 3210 using the transmission-related information.
 第2の装置3220の構成要素3221~3222は、1つ以上のプロセッサと、メモリとにより実装されてもよい。当該1つ以上のプロセッサは、例えば、CPU、MPU及びマイクロコントローラのうちの1つ以上を含んでよい。メモリは、揮発性メモリ及び不揮発性メモリを含んでもよい。メモリは、プログラムコード(インストラクション)を記憶していてもよい。1つ以上のプロセッサは、メモリに記憶されたプログラムコードを実行することにより、第2の装置3220の機能を実現してもよい。 The components 3221-3222 of the second device 3220 may be implemented with one or more processors and memory. The one or more processors may include, for example, one or more of a CPU, MPU and microcontroller. The memory may include volatile memory and non-volatile memory. The memory may store program code (instructions). One or more processors may implement the functionality of the second device 3220 by executing program code stored in memory.
 なお、第2の装置3220は、上記の第2の装置820と同じように動作してもよい。 Note that the second device 3220 may operate in the same manner as the second device 820 described above.
 <6-2.無線通信装置の処理の流れ>
 図36は、第1の装置3210の処理の流れを示すフローチャートである。取得部3211は、伝送関連情報を取得する(3501)。送信部3212は、伝送関連情報を第2の装置3220へ送信する(3502)。
<6-2. Flow of Processing of Wireless Communication Device>
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of the first device 3210 . The acquisition unit 3211 acquires transmission-related information (3501). The transmitter 3212 transmits transmission-related information to the second device 3220 (3502).
 図37は、第2の装置3220の処理の流れを示すフローチャートである。受信部3221は、第1の装置3210から伝送関連情報を受信する(3601)。処理部3222は、伝送関連情報を用いて、第1の装置3210との通信に関する処理を行う(3602)。 FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of the second device 3220. FIG. The receiver 3221 receives transmission-related information from the first device 3210 (3601). The processing unit 3222 uses the transmission-related information to perform processing related to communication with the first device 3210 (3602).
 上記の構成によれば、第1の装置3210と第2の装置3220との間で伝送関連情報をやり取りすることにより、第1の装置3210と第2の装置3220との間の伝送を改善することができる。 The above configuration improves transmission between the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 by exchanging transmission related information between the first device 3210 and the second device 3220. be able to.
 <6-3.変形例>
 本開示に係る技術は、上述した実施形態には限定されない。
<6-3. Variation>
The technology according to the present disclosure is not limited to the above-described embodiments.
 伝送関連情報は、第2の装置3220から第1の装置3210へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生成された情報であってもよい。 The transmission-related information may be information generated during the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second device 3220 to the first device 3210.
 第1の装置3210は、第2の装置3220から第1の装置3210へと送信された信号を下りリンク信号として端末装置(図示省略)へ送信するように構成されてもよい。この構成において、例えば、伝送関連情報は、第1の装置3210から端末装置へ送信されるべき下りリンク信号に関する情報であってもよい。伝送関連情報は、上記の下りリンク信号を周波数変換することにより得られた信号であってもよい。 The first device 3210 may be configured to transmit the signal transmitted from the second device 3220 to the first device 3210 as a downlink signal to the terminal device (not shown). In this configuration, for example, the transmission related information may be information about downlink signals to be transmitted from the first device 3210 to the terminal device. The transmission-related information may be a signal obtained by frequency-converting the downlink signal.
 伝送関連情報は、第2の装置3220から第1の装置3210へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生じた歪みに関する情報を含んでもよい。 The transmission-related information may include information about distortion caused during the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second device 3220 to the first device 3210.
 伝送関連情報は、第2の装置3220から第1の装置3210へと送信された信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力するニューラルネットワークのパラメータであってもよい。例えば、伝送関連情報は、上述した実施形態における第1のNN300のパラメータであってもよい。 The transmission related information may be parameters of a neural network that outputs an approximation of the signal generated through at least part of the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second device 3220 to the first device 3210. . For example, the transmission related information may be the parameters of the first NN 300 in the above embodiments.
 送信部3212は、第2の装置3220から送信された指示信号に応じて、伝送関連情報の送信を制御してもよい。例えば、指示信号は、上述した実施形態における第1の指示信号及び第2の指示信号を含んでもよい。 The transmission unit 3212 may control transmission of transmission-related information according to the instruction signal transmitted from the second device 3220. For example, the indication signal may include the first indication signal and the second indication signal in the embodiments described above.
 送信部3212は、第1の装置3210と第2の装置3220との間の伝送に関する所定の条件が成立した場合、伝送関連情報を第2の装置3220へ送信してもよい。所定の条件は、第2の装置3220から第1の装置3210へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生じた歪み量に関する条件であってもよい。上記の所定の条件は、上述した実施形態における第1の条件であってもよい。所定の条件は、上述した実施形態における第3の条件であってもよい。 The transmission unit 3212 may transmit transmission-related information to the second device 3220 when a predetermined condition regarding transmission between the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 is met. The predetermined condition may be a condition regarding the amount of distortion that occurs during the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second device 3220 to the first device 3210. FIG. The predetermined condition may be the first condition in the embodiment described above. The predetermined condition may be the third condition in the embodiment described above.
 第1の装置3210及び第2の装置3220は、TDD方式で動作するように構成されてもよい。この場合、送信部3212は、下りリンクのスロットにおいて、伝送関連情報を第2の装置3220へ送信してもよい。 The first device 3210 and the second device 3220 may be configured to operate in TDD mode. In this case, the transmitter 3212 may transmit the transmission-related information to the second device 3220 in downlink slots.
 第2の装置3220は、伝送関連情報の送信に関する指示信号を第1の装置3210へ送信する送信部を更に備えてもよい。例えば、指示信号は、上述した実施形態における第1の指示信号及び第2の指示信号を含んでもよい。 The second device 3220 may further include a transmission unit that transmits an instruction signal regarding transmission of transmission-related information to the first device 3210. For example, the indication signal may include the first indication signal and the second indication signal in the embodiments described above.
 第2の装置3220の送信部は、第1の装置3210と第2の装置3220との間の伝送に関する所定の条件が成立した場合、指示信号を第1の装置3210へ送信してもよい。上記の所定の条件は、上述した実施形態における第1の条件及び第2の条件を含んでもよい。 The transmission unit of the second device 3220 may transmit an instruction signal to the first device 3210 when a predetermined condition regarding transmission between the first device 3210 and the second device 3220 is satisfied. The predetermined conditions may include the first condition and the second condition in the embodiment described above.
 第1の装置3210及び第2の装置3220は、TDD方式で動作するように構成されてもよい。この場合、第2の装置3220の送信部は、上りリンクのスロットにおいて、指示信号を第1の装置3210へ送信してもよい。 The first device 3210 and the second device 3220 may be configured to operate in TDD mode. In this case, the transmitting section of the second device 3220 may transmit an instruction signal to the first device 3210 in an uplink slot.
 第1の装置3210との通信に関する処理は、デルタシグマ変調を含んでもよい。処理部3222は、伝送関連情報を用いてデルタシグマ変調を実行してもよい。処理部3222は、当該デルタシグマ変調により出力された信号を第1の装置3210へ送信してもよい。 The processing related to communication with the first device 3210 may include delta-sigma modulation. Processing unit 3222 may perform delta-sigma modulation using the transmission related information. The processing unit 3222 may transmit the signal output by the delta-sigma modulation to the first device 3210.
 第1の物理レイヤに関する処理は、フィルタリング処理、増幅処理及び周波数変換処理の1つ以上を含んでもよい。第1の物理レイヤに関する処理は、この例に限定されない。 The processing for the first physical layer may include one or more of filtering processing, amplification processing, and frequency conversion processing. The processing related to the first physical layer is not limited to this example.
 第2の物理レイヤに関する処理は、変調処理を含んでもよい。変調処理は、デルタシグマ変調を含んでもよい。第2の物理レイヤに関する処理は、第1の物理レイヤに関する処理よりも上位の処理である限り、他の処理であってもよい。 The processing related to the second physical layer may include modulation processing. The modulation process may include delta-sigma modulation. The processing related to the second physical layer may be other processing as long as it is higher-level processing than the processing related to the first physical layer.
 第1の装置3210及び第2の装置3220は、3GPPの技術仕様に準拠すると共に、O-RAN(Open RAN)アライアンスの技術仕様に準拠してもよい。 The first device 3210 and the second device 3220 conform to the technical specifications of 3GPP and may conform to the technical specifications of the O-RAN (Open RAN) Alliance.
 なお、以上説明した実施形態及び変形例はあくまで一例であり、本開示の技術的思想の範囲は、上述の構成に限定されない。本開示の技術的思想の範囲内で考えられるその他の態様も本開示の範囲内に含まれる。 It should be noted that the embodiments and modifications described above are merely examples, and the scope of the technical idea of the present disclosure is not limited to the above configurations. Other aspects conceivable within the scope of the technical concept of the present disclosure are also included within the scope of the present disclosure.
 上述した実施形態及び変形例は、デジタルシグマ変調を用いたRoFシステム以外のシステムに適用されてもよい。例えば、上述した実施形態及び変形例は、アナログRoFシステムに適用されてもよい。アナログRoFシステムは、アナログ信号を光信号に変換して、当該光信号を光ファイバ上で伝送する公知のシステムである。 The above-described embodiments and modifications may be applied to systems other than RoF systems using digital sigma modulation. For example, the embodiments and variations described above may be applied to analog RoF systems. An analog RoF system is a known system that converts an analog signal to an optical signal and transmits the optical signal over an optical fiber.
 フローチャート又はシーケンス図に示した処理ステップは、必ずしも図示した順序通りに実行されなくてもよい。処理ステップは図示した順序とは異なる順序で実行されてもよく、2つ以上の処理ステップが並列的に実行されてもよい。また、一部の処理ステップが削除されてもよく、さらなる処理ステップが追加されてもよい。 The processing steps shown in flowcharts or sequence diagrams do not necessarily have to be executed in the order shown. The processing steps may be performed in a different order than that shown, and two or more processing steps may be performed in parallel. Also, some processing steps may be deleted and further processing steps may be added.
 図面上の矢印は、ある構成要素から別の構成要素への信号(データ)の流れの方向を示す一例であり、上記2つの構成要素の双方向の通信を排除するものではない。 The arrows in the drawings are examples showing the direction of signal (data) flow from one component to another, and do not exclude bi-directional communication between the above two components.
 本明細書において、「XをYへ送信する」とは、XをYへ直接的に送信することに限られず、XをYへ間接的に送信すること(即ち、Xが他のノードへ送信され、Xが当該他のノードからYへ送信されること)を含む。同様に、「XをYから受信する」とは、XをYから直接的に受信することに限られず、XをYから間接的に受信すること(即ち、XがYから他のノードへ送信され、Xが当該他のノードから受信されること)を含む。従って、第1の装置810と第2の装置820との間に中継器が配置されてもよい。中継器は、第2の信号の送信及び/又は伝送関連情報の送信を中継してもよい。 As used herein, "transmitting X to Y" is not limited to transmitting X directly to Y, but indirectly transmitting X to Y (i.e., X transmitting to another node and X is sent from that other node to Y). Similarly, "receiving X from Y" is not limited to receiving X directly from Y, but indirectly receiving X from Y (i.e., X transmitted from Y to another node). and X is received from the other node). Accordingly, a repeater may be placed between the first device 810 and the second device 820 . A repeater may relay the transmission of the second signal and/or the transmission of the transmission related information.
 本明細書において説明した装置の機能は、ソフトウェア、ハードウェア、及びソフトウェアとハードウェアとの組み合わせのうちの何れかで実現されてもよい。ソフトウェアを構成するプログラムコード(インストラクション)は、例えば、各装置の内部又は外部のコンピュータ読取可能な記録媒体において記憶され、実行時にメモリへ読み込まれてプロセッサにより実行されてよい。また、プログラムコードを記録したコンピュータ読取可能な非一時的記録媒体(Non-transitory computer readable medium)が提供されてもよい。 The functions of the apparatus described herein may be implemented in software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. Program codes (instructions) constituting software may be stored, for example, in a computer-readable recording medium inside or outside each device, and may be read into a memory and executed by a processor at the time of execution. Also, a non-transitory computer readable medium recording the program code may be provided.
 上記実施形態及び変形例の一部又は全部は、以下の付記のようにも記載され得るが、以下には限られない。 Some or all of the above embodiments and modifications can also be described as the following supplementary notes, but are not limited to the following.
(付記1)
 第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置であって、
 前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得する取得部と、
 前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する送信部と、
 を備える第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 1)
A first radio access network device for processing on a first physical layer,
an acquisition unit for acquiring information on transmission between the first radio access network device and a second radio access network device that performs processing on a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer;
a transmitting unit configured to transmit the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device;
A first radio access network device comprising:
(付記2)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生成された情報である、付記1に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 2)
The first radio of Claim 1, wherein said information relating to said transmission is information generated in the course of transmission of a signal transmitted from said second radio access network device to said first radio access network device. Access network equipment.
(付記3)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から端末装置へ送信されるべき下りリンク信号に関する情報である、付記2に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 3)
3. The first radio access network device according to claim 2, wherein said information on said transmission is information on downlink signals to be transmitted from said first radio access network device to a terminal device.
(付記4)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記下りリンク信号を周波数変換することにより得られた信号である、付記3に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 4)
The first radio access network apparatus according to appendix 3, wherein the information about the transmission is a signal obtained by frequency-converting the downlink signal.
(付記5)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記伝送過程において生じた歪みに関する情報を含む、付記2に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 5)
3. The first radio access network apparatus according to clause 2, wherein said information relating to said transmission includes information relating to distortion caused in said transmission process.
(付記6)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力するニューラルネットワークのパラメータである、付記1に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 6)
Said information about said transmission is a neural output approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from said second radio access network device to said first radio access network device. A first radio access network device according to clause 1, which is a parameter of a network.
(付記7)
 前記送信部は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から送信された指示信号に応じて、前記伝送に関する前記情報の前記送信を制御する、付記1に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 7)
The first radio access network device according to appendix 1, wherein the transmission unit controls the transmission of the information regarding the transmission according to an instruction signal transmitted from the second radio access network device.
(付記8)
 前記指示信号は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ前記伝送に関する前記情報を送信することを前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置に対して指示する第1の指示信号を含む、付記7に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 8)
8. The claim of claim 7, wherein said indication signal comprises a first indication signal that instructs said first radio access network device to send said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device. A first radio access network device.
(付記9)
 前記第1の指示信号は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置が前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信する回数についての情報を含む、付記8に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 9)
9. The first method of claim 8, wherein the first indication signal includes information about the number of times the first radio access network device transmits the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device. radio access network equipment;
(付記10)
 前記第1の指示信号は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置が前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信する周期についての情報を含む、付記8に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 10)
9. The first method of claim 8, wherein the first indication signal includes information about a periodicity with which the first radio access network device transmits the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device. radio access network equipment;
(付記11)
 前記周期は、フレーム、サブフレーム又はスロットによって定義される、付記10に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 11)
11. The first radio access network apparatus according to clause 10, wherein said periodicity is defined by frames, subframes or slots.
(付記12)
 前記周期は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力するニューラルネットワークの学習期間によって定義される、付記10に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 12)
The period is a training neural network that outputs an approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from the second radio access network device to the first radio access network device. 11. The first radio access network device according to clause 10, defined by a time period.
(付記13)
 前記指示信号は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置への前記伝送に関する前記情報の送信を停止することを前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置に対して指示する第2の指示信号を含む、付記7に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 13)
Clause 7, wherein said indication signal comprises a second indication signal instructing said first radio access network device to stop sending said information relating to said transmission to said second radio access network device. A first radio access network device according to .
(付記14)
 前記送信部は、前記伝送に関する所定の条件が成立した場合、前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する、付記1に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 14)
The first radio access network device according to appendix 1, wherein the transmitting unit transmits the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device when a predetermined condition regarding the transmission is satisfied.
(付記15)
 前記所定の条件は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生じた歪み量に関する条件である、付記14に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 15)
15. The first radio access network device according to appendix 14, wherein the predetermined condition is a condition relating to an amount of distortion occurring in a transmission process of a signal transmitted from the second radio access network device to the first radio access network device. radio access network equipment;
(付記16)
 前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置及び前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex:TDD)方式で動作するように構成され、
 前記送信部は、下りリンクのスロットにおいて、前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する、付記1~15の何れか一項に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 16)
The first radio access network device and the second radio access network device are configured to operate in a Time Division Duplex (TDD) scheme,
16. The first radio access network device according to any one of appendices 1 to 15, wherein said transmitting unit transmits said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device in a downlink slot.
(付記17)
 第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置であって、
 前記第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を受信する受信部と、
 前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を行う処理部と、
 を備える第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 17)
A second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer,
a receiving unit for receiving information on transmission between a first radio access network device that performs processing related to the first physical layer and the second radio access network device;
a processing unit that performs processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission;
a second radio access network device comprising:
(付記18)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生成された情報である、付記17に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 18)
18. The second radio of clause 17, wherein said information relating to said transmission is information generated in the course of transmission of signals transmitted from said second radio access network device to said first radio access network device. Access network equipment.
(付記19)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から端末装置へ送信されるべき下りリンク信号に関する情報である、付記18に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 19)
19. The second radio access network device according to claim 18, wherein said information regarding said transmission is information regarding downlink signals to be transmitted from said first radio access network device to a terminal device.
(付記20)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記下りリンク信号を周波数変換することにより得られた信号である、付記19に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 20)
20. The second radio access network apparatus according to appendix 19, wherein said information about said transmission is a signal obtained by frequency converting said downlink signal.
(付記21)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記伝送過程において生じた歪みに関する情報を含む、付記18に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 21)
19. The second radio access network device according to clause 18, wherein said information relating to said transmission comprises information relating to distortion caused in said transmission process.
(付記22)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力するニューラルネットワークのパラメータである、付記17に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 22)
Said information about said transmission is a neural output approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from said second radio access network device to said first radio access network device. 18. The second radio access network device according to clause 17, which is a network parameter.
(付記23)
 前記伝送に関する前記情報の送信に関する指示信号を前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する送信部
 を更に備える付記17に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 23)
18. The second radio access network device according to claim 17, further comprising: a transmitting unit configured to transmit an indication signal regarding transmission of said information regarding said transmission to said first radio access network device.
(付記24)
 前記送信部は、前記伝送に関する所定の条件が成立した場合、前記指示信号を前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する、
 付記23に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 24)
wherein the transmission unit transmits the instruction signal to the first radio access network device when a predetermined condition regarding the transmission is satisfied;
24. A second radio access network device according to clause 23.
(付記25)
 前記所定の条件は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生じた歪み量に関する条件である、
 付記23に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 25)
The predetermined condition is a condition regarding the amount of distortion caused in the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second radio access network device to the first radio access network device,
24. A second radio access network device according to clause 23.
(付記26)
 前記指示信号は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ前記伝送に関する前記情報を送信することを前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置に対して指示する第1の指示信号を含む、付記23に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 26)
24. The claim of claim 23, wherein said indication signal comprises a first indication signal for instructing said first radio access network device to send said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device. A second radio access network device.
(付記27)
 前記第1の指示信号は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置が前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信する回数についての情報を含む、付記26に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 27)
27. The second of clause 26, wherein said first indication signal comprises information about the number of times said first radio access network device transmits said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device. radio access network equipment;
(付記28)
 前記第1の指示信号は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置が前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信する周期についての情報を含む、付記26に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 28)
27. The second of clause 26, wherein the first indication signal includes information about a period at which the first radio access network device transmits the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device. radio access network equipment;
(付記29)
 前記周期は、フレーム、サブフレーム又はスロットによって定義される、付記28に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 29)
29. The second radio access network device according to clause 28, wherein said periodicity is defined by frames, subframes or slots.
(付記30)
 前記周期は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力するニューラルネットワークの学習期間によって定義される、付記28に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 30)
The period is a training neural network that outputs an approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from the second radio access network device to the first radio access network device. 29. The second radio access network device according to clause 28, defined by a time period.
(付記31)
 前記指示信号は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置への前記伝送に関する前記情報の送信を停止することを前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置に対して指示する第2の指示信号を含む、付記23に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 31)
Note 23, wherein said indication signal comprises a second indication signal instructing said first radio access network device to stop sending said information relating to said transmission to said second radio access network device. 2. A second radio access network device according to .
(付記32)
 前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置及び前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex:TDD)方式で動作するように構成され、
 前記送信部は、上りリンクのスロットにおいて、前記指示信号を前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する、付記23~31の何れか一項に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 32)
The first radio access network device and the second radio access network device are configured to operate in a Time Division Duplex (TDD) scheme,
32. The second radio access network device according to any one of appendices 23 to 31, wherein said transmitting unit transmits said instruction signal to said first radio access network device in an uplink slot.
(付記33)
 前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との前記通信に関する前記処理は、デルタシグマ変調を含む、付記17~32の何れか一項に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 33)
33. The second radio access network device according to any one of the clauses 17-32, wherein said processing relating to said communication with said first radio access network device comprises delta-sigma modulation.
(付記34)
 前記処理部は、前記デルタシグマ変調により出力された信号を前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する、付記33に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
(Appendix 34)
34. The second radio access network device according to appendix 33, wherein the processing unit transmits the signal output by the delta-sigma modulation to the first radio access network device.
(付記35)
 第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、
 前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、
 を備え、
 前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、
 前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得し、
 前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信し、
 前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、
 前記伝送に関する前記情報を受信し、
 前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を実行する、
 無線通信装置。
(Appendix 35)
a first radio access network device for processing on a first physical layer;
a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer;
with
The first radio access network device,
obtaining information regarding transmissions between the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device;
sending said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device;
The second radio access network device,
receiving said information relating to said transmission;
using the information relating to the transmission to perform processing relating to communication with the first radio access network device;
wireless communication device.
(付記36)
 第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置における方法であって、
 前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得することと、
 前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信することと、
 を含む方法。
(Appendix 36)
A method in a first radio access network device for processing on a first physical layer, comprising:
obtaining information on transmission between the first radio access network device and a second radio access network device performing processing on a second physical layer above the first physical layer;
sending said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device;
method including.
(付記37)
 第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置における方法であって、
 前記第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を受信することと、
 前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を行うことと、
 を含む方法。
(Appendix 37)
A method in a second radio access network device for processing on a second physical layer above the first physical layer, comprising:
receiving information about transmissions between a first radio access network device performing processing for the first physical layer and the second radio access network device;
performing processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission;
method including.
(付記38)
 第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得することと、
 前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信することと、
 をプロセッサに実行させるプログラムを記録したコンピュータに読み取り可能な非一時的記録媒体。
(Appendix 38)
relating to transmission between a first radio access network device performing processing relating to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device performing processing relating to a second physical layer higher than said first physical layer obtaining information;
sending said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device;
A computer-readable non-transitory recording medium that records a program that causes a processor to execute
(付記39)
 第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を受信することと、
 前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を行うことと、
 をプロセッサに実行させるプログラムを記録したコンピュータに読み取り可能な非一時的記録媒体。
(Appendix 39)
relating to transmission between a first radio access network device performing processing relating to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device performing processing relating to a second physical layer higher than said first physical layer receiving information;
performing processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission;
A computer-readable non-transitory recording medium that records a program that causes a processor to execute
 2つの通信装置の間の伝送を改善するための適切な情報を送信又は受信することができる。 Appropriate information can be sent or received to improve the transmission between the two communication devices.
110     :デルタシグマ変調装置
111     :デルタシグマ変調部
112     :ニューラルネットワーク処理部
113     :ニューラルネットワーク学習部
810     :第1の装置
820     :第2の装置
3210    :第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置
3220    :第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置

 
110: delta-sigma modulation device 111: delta-sigma modulation unit 112: neural network processing unit 113: neural network learning unit 810: first device 820: second device 3210: first radio access network device 3220: second Radio access network equipment

Claims (39)

  1.  第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置であって、
     前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得する取得部と、
     前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する送信部と、
     を備える第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
    A first radio access network device for processing on a first physical layer,
    an acquisition unit for acquiring information on transmission between the first radio access network device and a second radio access network device that performs processing on a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer;
    a transmitting unit configured to transmit the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device;
    A first radio access network device comprising:
  2.  前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生成された情報である、請求項1に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The first radio access network device according to claim 1, wherein said information relating to said transmission is information generated in the course of transmission of signals transmitted from said second radio access network device to said first radio access network device. radio access network equipment;
  3.  前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から端末装置へ送信されるべき下りリンク信号に関する情報である、請求項2に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The first radio access network device according to claim 2, wherein said information on said transmission is information on downlink signals to be transmitted from said first radio access network device to a terminal device.
  4.  前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記下りリンク信号を周波数変換することにより得られた信号である、請求項3に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The first radio access network apparatus according to claim 3, wherein said information regarding said transmission is a signal obtained by frequency-converting said downlink signal.
  5.  前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記伝送過程において生じた歪みに関する情報を含む、請求項2に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The first radio access network device according to claim 2, wherein said information about said transmission includes information about distortion caused in said transmission process.
  6.  前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力するニューラルネットワークのパラメータである、請求項1に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 Said information about said transmission is a neural output approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from said second radio access network device to said first radio access network device. The first radio access network device according to claim 1, being a network parameter.
  7.  前記送信部は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から送信された指示信号に応じて、前記伝送に関する前記情報の前記送信を制御する、請求項1に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The first radio access network device according to claim 1, wherein said transmission unit controls said transmission of said information regarding said transmission according to an instruction signal transmitted from said second radio access network device.
  8.  前記指示信号は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ前記伝送に関する前記情報を送信することを前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置に対して指示する第1の指示信号を含む、請求項7に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 8. The indication signal according to claim 7, wherein said indication signal comprises a first indication signal for instructing said first radio access network device to send said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device. a first radio access network device of .
  9.  前記第1の指示信号は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置が前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信する回数についての情報を含む、請求項8に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 9. The first of claim 8, wherein said first indication signal comprises information about the number of times said first radio access network device transmits said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device. radio access network equipment.
  10.  前記第1の指示信号は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置が前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信する周期についての情報を含む、請求項8に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 10. The first of claim 8, wherein the first indication signal comprises information about the periodicity with which the first radio access network device sends the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device. radio access network equipment.
  11.  前記周期は、フレーム、サブフレーム又はスロットによって定義される、請求項10に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The first radio access network device according to claim 10, wherein said periodicity is defined by frames, subframes or slots.
  12.  前記周期は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力するニューラルネットワークの学習期間によって定義される、請求項10に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The period is a training neural network that outputs an approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from the second radio access network device to the first radio access network device. 11. The first radio access network device according to claim 10, defined by a time period.
  13.  前記指示信号は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置への前記伝送に関する前記情報の送信を停止することを前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置に対して指示する第2の指示信号を含む、請求項7に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 3. The indication signal comprises a second indication signal instructing the first radio access network device to stop sending the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device. 8. A first radio access network device according to claim 7.
  14.  前記送信部は、前記伝送に関する所定の条件が成立した場合、前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する、請求項1に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The first radio access network device according to claim 1, wherein said transmitting unit transmits said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device when a predetermined condition regarding said transmission is satisfied.
  15.  前記所定の条件は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生じた歪み量に関する条件である、請求項14に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 15. The first according to claim 14, wherein said predetermined condition is a condition relating to the amount of distortion occurring in a transmission process of a signal transmitted from said second radio access network device to said first radio access network device. radio access network equipment.
  16.  前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置及び前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex:TDD)方式で動作するように構成され、
     前記送信部は、下りリンクのスロットにおいて、前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する、請求項1~15の何れか一項に記載の第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
    The first radio access network device and the second radio access network device are configured to operate in a Time Division Duplex (TDD) scheme,
    The first radio access network device according to any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein said transmitter transmits said information on said transmission to said second radio access network device in a downlink slot.
  17.  第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置であって、
     前記第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を受信する受信部と、
     前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を行う処理部と、
     を備える第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
    A second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer,
    a receiving unit for receiving information on transmission between a first radio access network device that performs processing related to the first physical layer and the second radio access network device;
    a processing unit that performs processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission;
    a second radio access network device comprising:
  18.  前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生成された情報である、請求項17に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 18. The second radio access network device according to claim 17, wherein said information relating to said transmission is information generated in the course of transmission of signals transmitted from said second radio access network device to said first radio access network device. radio access network equipment;
  19.  前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から端末装置へ送信されるべき下りリンク信号に関する情報である、請求項18に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The second radio access network device according to claim 18, wherein said information on said transmission is information on downlink signals to be transmitted from said first radio access network device to a terminal device.
  20.  前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記下りリンク信号を周波数変換することにより得られた信号である、請求項19に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The second radio access network device according to claim 19, wherein said information about said transmission is a signal obtained by frequency-converting said downlink signal.
  21.  前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記伝送過程において生じた歪みに関する情報を含む、請求項18に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The second radio access network device according to claim 18, wherein said information relating to said transmission comprises information relating to distortion caused during said transmission process.
  22.  前記伝送に関する前記情報は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力するニューラルネットワークのパラメータである、請求項17に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 Said information about said transmission is a neural output approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from said second radio access network device to said first radio access network device. 18. The second radio access network device according to claim 17, being a network parameter.
  23.  前記伝送に関する前記情報の送信に関する指示信号を前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する送信部
     を更に備える請求項17に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
    18. The second radio access network device according to claim 17, further comprising: a transmitting unit configured to transmit an indication signal regarding transmission of said information regarding said transmission to said first radio access network device.
  24.  前記送信部は、前記伝送に関する所定の条件が成立した場合、前記指示信号を前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する、
     請求項23に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
    wherein the transmission unit transmits the instruction signal to the first radio access network device when a predetermined condition regarding the transmission is satisfied;
    A second radio access network device according to claim 23.
  25.  前記所定の条件は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程において生じた歪み量に関する条件である、
     請求項23に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
    The predetermined condition is a condition regarding the amount of distortion caused in the transmission process of the signal transmitted from the second radio access network device to the first radio access network device,
    A second radio access network device according to claim 23.
  26.  前記指示信号は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ前記伝送に関する前記情報を送信することを前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置に対して指示する第1の指示信号を含む、請求項23に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 24. The method of claim 23, wherein said indication signal comprises a first indication signal for instructing said first radio access network device to send said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device. a second radio access network device of .
  27.  前記第1の指示信号は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置が前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信する回数についての情報を含む、請求項26に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 27. The second of claim 26, wherein said first indication signal comprises information about the number of times said first radio access network device transmits said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device. radio access network equipment.
  28.  前記第1の指示信号は、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置が前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信する周期についての情報を含む、請求項26に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 27. The second of claim 26, wherein the first indication signal comprises information about a periodicity with which the first radio access network device sends the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device. radio access network equipment.
  29.  前記周期は、フレーム、サブフレーム又はスロットによって定義される、請求項28に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The second radio access network device according to claim 28, wherein said periodicity is defined by frames, subframes or slots.
  30.  前記周期は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置から前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へと送信された信号の伝送過程の少なくとも一部を経て生成される信号の近似値を出力するニューラルネットワークの学習期間によって定義される、請求項28に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The period is a training neural network that outputs an approximation of a signal generated through at least part of a transmission process of a signal transmitted from the second radio access network device to the first radio access network device. 29. The second radio access network device according to claim 28, defined by a time period.
  31.  前記指示信号は、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置への前記伝送に関する前記情報の送信を停止することを前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置に対して指示する第2の指示信号を含む、請求項23に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 4. The indication signal comprises a second indication signal instructing the first radio access network device to stop sending the information regarding the transmission to the second radio access network device. 24. A second radio access network device according to 23.
  32.  前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置及び前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex:TDD)方式で動作するように構成され、
     前記送信部は、上りリンクのスロットにおいて、前記指示信号を前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する、請求項23~31の何れか一項に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。
    The first radio access network device and the second radio access network device are configured to operate in a Time Division Duplex (TDD) scheme,
    The second radio access network device according to any one of claims 23 to 31, wherein said transmitting unit transmits said instruction signal to said first radio access network device in an uplink slot.
  33.  前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との前記通信に関する前記処理は、デルタシグマ変調を含む、請求項17~32の何れか一項に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The second radio access network device according to any one of claims 17-32, wherein said processing relating to said communication with said first radio access network device comprises delta-sigma modulation.
  34.  前記処理部は、前記デルタシグマ変調により出力された信号を前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信する、請求項33に記載の第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置。 The second radio access network device according to claim 33, wherein said processing unit transmits the signal output by said delta-sigma modulation to said first radio access network device.
  35.  第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、
     前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、
     を備え、
     前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、
     前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得し、
     前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信し、
     前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置は、
     前記伝送に関する前記情報を受信し、
     前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を実行する、
     無線通信装置。
    a first radio access network device for processing on a first physical layer;
    a second radio access network device that performs processing related to a second physical layer higher than the first physical layer;
    with
    The first radio access network device,
    obtaining information regarding transmissions between the first radio access network device and the second radio access network device;
    sending said information about said transmission to said second radio access network device;
    The second radio access network device,
    receiving said information relating to said transmission;
    using the information relating to the transmission to perform processing relating to communication with the first radio access network device;
    wireless communication device.
  36.  第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置における方法であって、
     前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得することと、
     前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信することと、
     を含む方法。
    A method in a first radio access network device for processing on a first physical layer, comprising:
    obtaining information on transmission between the first radio access network device and a second radio access network device performing processing on a second physical layer above the first physical layer;
    sending said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device;
    method including.
  37.  第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置における方法であって、
     前記第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を受信することと、
     前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を行うことと、
     を含む方法。
    A method in a second radio access network device for processing on a second physical layer above the first physical layer, comprising:
    receiving information about transmissions between a first radio access network device performing processing for the first physical layer and the second radio access network device;
    performing processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission;
    method including.
  38.  第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を取得することと、
     前記伝送に関する前記情報を前記第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置へ送信することと、
     をプロセッサに実行させるプログラムを記録したコンピュータに読み取り可能な非一時的記録媒体。
    relating to transmission between a first radio access network device performing processing relating to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device performing processing relating to a second physical layer higher than said first physical layer obtaining information;
    sending said information regarding said transmission to said second radio access network device;
    A computer-readable non-transitory recording medium that records a program that causes a processor to execute
  39.  第1の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置と、前記第1の物理レイヤよりも上位の第2の物理レイヤに関する処理を行う第2の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との間の伝送に関する情報を受信することと、
     前記伝送に関する前記情報を用いて、前記第1の無線アクセスネットワーク装置との通信に関する処理を行うことと、
     をプロセッサに実行させるプログラムを記録したコンピュータに読み取り可能な非一時的記録媒体。

     
    relating to transmission between a first radio access network device performing processing relating to a first physical layer and a second radio access network device performing processing relating to a second physical layer higher than said first physical layer receiving information;
    performing processing related to communication with the first radio access network device using the information related to the transmission;
    A computer-readable non-transitory recording medium that records a program that causes a processor to execute

PCT/JP2021/030241 2021-08-18 2021-08-18 Wireless access network device, wireless communication device, method and recording medium WO2023021626A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2021/030241 WO2023021626A1 (en) 2021-08-18 2021-08-18 Wireless access network device, wireless communication device, method and recording medium
JP2023542104A JPWO2023021626A1 (en) 2021-08-18 2021-08-18

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2021/030241 WO2023021626A1 (en) 2021-08-18 2021-08-18 Wireless access network device, wireless communication device, method and recording medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023021626A1 true WO2023021626A1 (en) 2023-02-23

Family

ID=85240346

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/030241 WO2023021626A1 (en) 2021-08-18 2021-08-18 Wireless access network device, wireless communication device, method and recording medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2023021626A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2023021626A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2015050770A (en) * 2013-08-30 2015-03-16 富士通株式会社 Digital predistortion apparatus and method
WO2016147530A1 (en) * 2015-03-19 2016-09-22 日本電気株式会社 Reception circuit, reception device, reception method, reception device of radio base station, and reception method thereof
WO2020083508A1 (en) * 2018-10-26 2020-04-30 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Remote radio unit and central unit for multiple-input multiple-output system

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2015050770A (en) * 2013-08-30 2015-03-16 富士通株式会社 Digital predistortion apparatus and method
WO2016147530A1 (en) * 2015-03-19 2016-09-22 日本電気株式会社 Reception circuit, reception device, reception method, reception device of radio base station, and reception method thereof
WO2020083508A1 (en) * 2018-10-26 2020-04-30 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Remote radio unit and central unit for multiple-input multiple-output system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2023021626A1 (en) 2023-02-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8630211B2 (en) Hybrid radio architecture for repeaters using RF cancellation reference
EP3176951B1 (en) Passive inter-modulation (pim) interference cancellation method for radio frequency module and relevant apparatus
US10727896B2 (en) Tower top device and passive intermodulation cancellation method
CN102362543B (en) A method for data transmission using an envelope elimination and restoration amplifier, an envelope elimination and restoration amplifier, a transmitting device, a receiving device, and a communication network therefor
KR102408875B1 (en) Method and apparatus for canceling self interference signal in communication system
US20140064348A1 (en) Digital Post-Distortion Compensation in Telecommunication Systems
US20100080165A1 (en) Mimo repeater apparatus, mimo handheld terminal apparatus, mimo wireless communication method
CN101563851A (en) Analog signal path modeling for self-interference cancellation
CN109997325A (en) A kind of digital pre-distortion processing method and device
US11342952B2 (en) Millimeter wave (MMWAVE) system and methods
KR102614383B1 (en) Apparatus and methods for self -interference signal cancellation
CN110661546B (en) Method and system for eliminating harmonic interference digital domain in 5G terminal based on NSA architecture
CN104486273A (en) Self-adaptive direct quadrature variable-frequency modulation error correction method
US9906262B2 (en) All-analog and hybrid radio interference cancellation using cables, attenuators and power splitters
US10224881B2 (en) Systems and methods using digital predistortion to linearize radio transmitter operation
KR20130049175A (en) Method and device for sending/receiving electromagnetic signals received/sent on one or more first frequency bands
WO2023021626A1 (en) Wireless access network device, wireless communication device, method and recording medium
WO2018058619A1 (en) Passive intermodulation (pim) cancellation method and device, and base station
WO2023021625A1 (en) Delta-sigma modulator, delta-sigma modulation method, and recording medium
JP2022505466A (en) Remote radio unit and central unit for multi-input multi-output systems
Askar et al. Agile full-duplex transceiver: The concept and self-interference channel characteristics
EP4037207A1 (en) Radio apparatus and system
EP3242421B1 (en) Node unit capable of measuring delay and distributed antenna system comprising same
US20230054311A1 (en) Delta-sigma modulation apparatus, delta-sigma modulation method, and recording medium
CN101420397B (en) Digital repeater station and self-excited eliminating method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21954199

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023542104

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE